Livro WiseUp 13

Prévia do material em texto

Chapters.
1 Shopping in the U.S. p. 03
2 Return Policy p. 23
3 Shopping for Clothes p. 45
4 Sizes and Measures p. 67
5 Shopping for Shoes p. 88
6 Shopping for Cosmetics p. 108
7 Shopping for Electronics p. 127
8 Shopping for Appliances p. 146
9 Online Shopping p. 168
10 Grammar Guide p. 188
Arquivo Interativo. 
Interações no menu ao 
lado, topo e base das 
páginas, e nas indicações 
do Grammar Guide no 
final de cada lesson.
Shopping
in the U.S.
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[On Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
So, you’re in the U.S. on vacation! You’re probably going to do some 
shopping, right? Yes! You’re totally going to do some shopping! The U.S. 
is one of the biggest shopping destinations, f illed with so many offers 
beyond belief! My name is Amy, and here I am on Rodeo Drive, which is 
one of the most iconic shopping destinations in the U.S. I don’t know if I 
can afford to be here!
[On Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
Hey, everybody! My name is Lucas, and I’m right here at Third Street 
Promenade! Now, in this series, we’re going to make sure that you’ll 
have all the tips, so you don’t get lost. But I can’t guarantee that you’re 
not going to get carried away!
[On Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
To get started, if you intend on doing any shopping in the U.S., you’ll 
have to understand something called sales tax. Why is it so important? 
Because the price you see on the tag does not include sales tax.
[On Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
The sales tax is a combination of the states’ sales tax and the local city’s 
sales tax, which is why you see that it varies not only from state to state, 
but also from city to city. So, for example, in California, the sales tax is a 
combination of the state sales tax and, on average, the local city’s sales 
tax will make it be about 9%. Which means that you’re going to be 
paying 9% more on average than what the price tag is telling you.
SHOPPING IN THE U.S.
When we talk about sales, we can’t ignore that the United States has great 
potential. There is a whole system to please the customers and make sure they 
will be back for more. So, in this chapter, you will see some tips on how to enjoy 
this shoppers’ paradise to the fullest. Besides that, you will also learn some 
language items that will help you improve your English skills. Now, look at the 
script of Shopping in the U.S.
< voltar para o índice
4
Part 1.
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[On Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
So, I’m going to let you in on a little secret. There are actually four 
states in the U.S. that do not charge sales tax. They are Oregon, New 
Hampshire, Montana, and Delaware. So, keep that in mind if the main 
purpose of your trip is to go shopping.
[On Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
If shopping is still one of the main purposes of your visit, but you don’t 
plan on visiting any of those four states, another tip that we can give you 
is that, in a few states, international customers can qualify for a sales tax 
refund. This means that the money that you spend on sales taxes can 
go back to you before you leave. And remember, this is a state by state 
policy, so I recommend that you do your research before you travel.
[On Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Now that you’re familiar with the sales tax, let’s talk about options! You 
can f ind almost any item imaginable for sale in America! You’ll f ind all 
sorts of sales! There’s the “buy one, get one free,” which is the “BOGO” 
sale. “Buy one, get one half off,” “buy two, get one free”…you get the 
idea…There are so many sales!
[Lucas and Amy are at a store]
Lucas:
So, we actually have someone that’s going to help us answer a couple of 
questions, this is Lucy, and Lucy, you’re a sales associate, right? Can you 
describe what a typical interaction is between you and a customer?
Lucy:
Sure! Well, typically if someone has a question for me about a product 
or they’re trying to f ind something, they’ll come up to me and say, “Hi, 
excuse me, can I ask you a question? Where would I f ind a nightgown?” 
And then I’ll tell them where to f ind it. Or maybe they want to know, 
“Does it come in a different size?” So, they’ll say, “Hey, does this shirt 
come in size small?”
Lucas:
And one important thing I think to note is that Lucy works at a store that 
has a lot of different departments in it. So, a giant store like the one that 
we’re in right now, where you might then often direct people to certain 
departments, or certain sections of the store.
< voltar para o índice
5
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lucy:
Exactly! Where are electronics and things like that!
Amy:
Do you think that there’s a big difference between working in a larger 
store like this versus a boutique, with the salesperson experience?
Lucy:
I think so. I think a salesperson in a boutique is much more...sort of 
intimate interaction, where maybe I would really be helping them try to 
pick out an outf it or something like that. Whereas in a bigger store, not 
so much.
Lucas:
It’s important to know exactly how to approach someone and, correct 
me if I’m wrong, but one very safe way to approach a customer service 
representative is just by walking up to them, getting close to them, so that 
they can hear you say, “Hey, excuse me. Can you help me with something?” 
We appreciate you, Lucy! Thank you for helping us out with this!
Lucy:
Absolutely! My pleasure!
COMPRANDO NOS E.U.A.
[Na Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Você está de férias nos EUA! Você provavelmente vai fazer compras, 
certo? Sim! Você com certeza vai fazer compras! Os EUA são um dos 
maiores destinos para compras, repletos de ofertas que são dif íceis 
de acreditar! Meu nome é Amy. Estou na Rodeo Drive, que é um dos 
destinos mais icônicos para compras nos EUA, e eu não sei se tenho 
grana para estar aqui!
[Na Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
Oi, pessoal! Meu nome é Lucas, e estou aqui na Third Street Promenade! 
Nesta série, vamos garantir que você tenha todas as dicas para não se 
perder! Mas não posso garantir que você não vá se deixar levar!
< voltar para o índice
6
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Na Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Para começar, se você pretende fazer compras nos EUA, você precisa 
entender algo chamado imposto sobre vendas. Por que ele é tão 
importante? Porque o preço que você vê na etiqueta não inclui o 
imposto sobre a venda.
[Na Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
O imposto sobre vendas é uma combinação da tributação sobre vendas 
do estado e a tributação municipal. É por isso que podemos ver uma 
variação não somente entre estados, mas também de cidade para 
cidade. Por exemplo, na Califórnia, esse imposto é a combinação da 
tributação estadual com o imposto municipal, que resulta, em média, em 
9%. Isso signif ica que você, via de regra, vai pagar 9% a mais do que o 
preço que aparece na etiqueta.
[Na Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Vou contar um segredinho: existem quatro estados nos EUA que não 
cobram imposto sobre vendas. Eles são Oregon, New Hampshire, 
Montana e Delaware. Considere isso se a razão principal da sua viagem 
for fazer compras.
[Na Third Street Promenade]
Lucas:
Se fazer compras ainda é uma das razões principais da sua visita, mas 
você não tem planos de visitar esses quatro estados, outra dica que 
podemos dar é que, em alguns estados, clientes internacionais podem 
pedir a restituição desses impostos. Ou seja, o dinheiro que você 
gastar nesses tributos pode ser reembolsado antes de você partir. Mas 
lembrem: isso é uma política que varia de estado para estado; então, 
aconselho que você faça uma pesquisa antes de viajar.
[Na Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Agora que você se familiarizou com o imposto sobre vendas, vamos 
falar de opções! Você pode encontrar quase tudo imaginável à venda 
nos Estados Unidos! Você vai encontrar todo tipo de promoção! Temos 
a “compre um, leve dois”, que é conhecida como promoção “BOGO”. 
“Compre um e ganhe 50% na segunda unidade”, “compre dois eganhe 
o terceiro”... vocês entenderam... há muitas promoções!
< voltar para o índice
7
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Amy e Lucas estão numa loja]
Lucas:
Temos aqui alguém que vai nos ajudar a responder algumas perguntas: 
o nome dela é Lucy, e você é uma representante de vendas, certo? Você 
poderia descrever como é a interação entre você e um cliente?
Lucy:
Claro! Normalmente, se alguém tem dúvida sobre um produto, ou se 
está tentando achar algo, vai vir falar comigo e dizer: “Oi, com licença! 
Eu poderia fazer uma pergunta? Onde posso achar uma camisola?” E, 
então, eu informo onde a pessoa pode achá-la. Ou talvez queiram saber 
se um artigo é vendido em outro tamanho. Então, vão perguntar: “Você 
tem essa camisa no tamanho P?” 
Lucas:
E algo importante de se lembrar é que a Lucy trabalha em uma loja com 
diferentes departamentos. Logo, em uma loja grande, com o mesmo 
tamanho da loja em que estamos agora, você pode acabar encaminhando 
clientes para outros departamentos, ou outras partes da loja.
Lucy:
Exatamente! Onde f ica a parte de eletrônicos e coisas do tipo.
Amy:
Você acha que há uma grande diferença entre trabalhar em uma loja 
maior como essa e em uma boutique, quando o assunto é trabalhar com 
vendas?
Lucy:
Sim. Acho que a relação de um vendedor em uma loja menor é bem 
mais intimista; é uma interação em que eu estaria dando mais apoio ao 
cliente ao tentar escolher um look ou algo do tipo. Já em uma loja maior, 
essa situação não acontece.
Lucas:
É importante saber como chamar a atenção de alguém, e, por favor, me 
corrija se eu estiver errado, mas um jeito simples de se pedir ajuda a um 
vendedor é apenas se aproximar, para que ele possa te ouvir, e dizer: 
“Com licença, você poderia me dar uma ajuda?” Muito obrigado, Lucy! 
Obrigado por nos ajudar!
Lucy:
Sem problemas! O prazer é todo meu!
< voltar para o índice
8
Video Script VocabularyChapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Depending on the kind of store, there will be a difference in the price of the products and the 
kind of assistance you can get.
If you are looking for something specif ic, go to one of these stores:
You can easily f ind all that in shopping malls. At specialized stores, the 
salespeople will probably approach you and say:
Shoe stores
Lojas de calçados / 
Sapatarias
Clothing stores
Lojas de roupas
Cosmetics stores
Lojas de cosméticos
KINDS OF STORES
Hello, my name is (Erin). Let me know if you need any help. 
Oi, meu nome é (Erin). Me avise se precisar de alguma coisa.
Good afternoon, can I help you with anything?
Boa tarde, posso te ajudar com alguma coisa? 
If you need assistance, you can say:
Yes, please. I’m looking for a perfume. 
 Sim, por favor. Estou procurando um perfume.
< voltar para o índice
9
Part 2.
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
And if you don’t need help, you can say:
Thanks, I’m just browsing around. 
Obrigado, eu só estou dando uma olhada.
In department stores, you look for what you need 
by yourself, and if you need assistance, you may 
approach a sales associate by saying: 
Excuse me. 
Com licença.
GREETINGS
And then you should greet the person:
 Good morning. 
 Bom dia. 
 Good afternoon. 
 Boa tarde.
 Good evening. 
 Boa noite. 
 Good night. 
 Boa noite. / Tenha uma 
 boa noite de sono. 
Remember: we do not say Good night to greet people. It is a kind of farewell to 
wish someone a good night’s sleep. 
Now, to mention what you need, you can say:
I’m looking for the electronics section, please. 
Estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos, por favor.
Where can I find home appliances? 
Onde posso achar eletrodomésticos? 
Where is the fitting room?
Onde é/f ica o provador?
< voltar para o índice
10
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
The sales associate may offer to take you to the section or just 
give you the directions to get there, for example: 
The electronics are on the third floor. 
Os eletrônicos estão/f icam no terceiro andar. 
The home appliances are on aisle number 10. 
Os eletrodomésticos estão/f icam no corredor número 10.
The fitting room is upstairs. 
O provador é/f ica no andar de cima.
Remember to thank them and say farewell. 
For example:
Thank you. Have a nice day. 
Obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia.
Thanks a lot. Have a nice one. 
Muito obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia!
Thanks for your help. 
Obrigado(a) pela sua ajuda.
Even though the following farewells are very common, they are too 
informal, unfit for this situation. So, avoid saying:
See you later. 
Te vejo mais tarde.
See you soon. 
Te vejo em breve.
After you thank the associate and 
say farewell, they may answer: Anytime. / Not at all. 
Disponha. / Não há de quê.
< voltar para o índice
11
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Now you know how to approach and interact with a 
salesperson, some common sales in the U.S., and some 
important information on sales taxes.
The United States is well-known for its amazing discounts and 
combos. Let’s take a look at some popular ones:
TYPES OF SALES
Remember that the price you see on the price tag is not the f inal 
amount you are going to pay. You have to add the sales taxes to it.
Sales taxes vary from state to state; that’s why it is really important 
to do some research before you travel to learn these values. You 
may use an online research website and type:
Sales tax in the U.S. + current year
Imposto sobre vendas nos Estados Unidos + ano vigente 
Depending on the state, you may get a tax refund. Check if the 
state you are visiting has this policy by typing:
Sales tax refund + (Texas) + tourists 
Reembolso de impostos sobre vendas + (estado de sua preferência) + turistas
Buy one, get one free
Compre 1, leve 2
Buy one, get one half-off
Compre um e ganhe 50% de desconto na segunda unidade
Buy two, get one free
Compre 2, leve mais 1 / Leve 3, pague 2
< voltar para o índice
12
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
4 / 7 / 1 / 8 / 10 / 2 / 
6 / 9 / 11 / 3 / 12 / 5
Activity B – Answers
a. Have a nice day / 
 Have a nice one
b. browsing around
c. electronics section
d. home appliances
e. fitting room
f. upstairs
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Shoe store 
( 2 ) Clothing store 
( 3 ) Cosmetics store 
( 4 ) To browse around 
( 5 ) Electronics section 
( 6 ) Home appliances 
( 7 ) Fitting room
( 8 ) Third f loor 
( 9 ) Aisle 
( 10 ) Upstairs 
( 11 ) Sales tax 
( 12 ) Tax refund
( ) Dar uma olhada
( ) Provador
( ) Loja de calçados / Sapataria
( ) Terceiro andar 
( ) Andar de cima
( ) Loja de roupas
( ) Eletrodomésticos
( ) Corredor 
( ) Imposto sobre vendas 
( ) Loja de cosméticos 
( ) Reembolso de imposto
( ) Seção de eletrônicos
a) Thank you. . 
 Obrigado(a). Tenha um bom dia. 
b) Thanks, I’m just .
 Obrigado, eu só estou dando uma olhada. 
c) I’m looking for the , 
 please. 
 Estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos, 
 por favor. 
d) Where can I find ?
 Onde posso achar eletrodomésticos? 
e) Where is the ?
 Onde é/fica o provador? 
f) The fitting room is .
 O provador é/fica no andar de cima. 
13
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we are going to talk about the simple present of the verb to be, the 
present continuous, subject pronouns, the question word where, and the spelling 
rules of verbs in the -ING form.
We use the verb to be to talk about location, feelings, nationality, characteristics, 
occupation, among others. Let’s see some examples that convey location. Check it out:
The electronics are onthe third floor. 
 Os eletrônicos estão/f icam no terceiro andar. 
 The home appliances are on aisle number 10. 
 Os eletrodomésticos estão/f icam no corredor número 10. 
 The fitting room is upstairs. 
 O provador é/f ica no andar de cima.
Now, let’s take a look at the structure of the verb to be:
Affirmative Form
SUBJECT + VERB TO BE + COMPLEMENT
Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Complemento
Negative Form
SUBJECT + VERB TO BE + NOT + COMPLEMENT
Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Not + Complemento
Interrogative form
VERB TO BE + SUBJECT + COMPLEMENT
Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Complemento
VERB TO BE
< voltar para o índice
14
Part 4.
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
And even though the verb to be has a different conjugation for each person, this 
general structure won’t change. We very often use it with subject pronouns. 
Let’s take a look at them:
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
Singular
 
I = eu
you = tu; você 
he = ele (gênero masculino) 
she = ela (gênero feminino)
it = ele; ela (exceto pessoas); isso
Plural 
we = nós
you = vós; vocês 
they = eles; elas (pessoas, 
animais, coisas, lugares, 
sentimentos, ideias, etc.)
Remember: the subject pronouns replace both proper and common nouns 
when they are the subject of the sentence. Let’s see how it works with the verb 
to be. First, in the affirmative form:
As you can see, all conjugations accept a contracted form of the subject 
pronouns with the verb to be. 
In the negative form, as we have already seen, we place not after the verb to be. 
And we can also use it in the contracted form. Check this out: 
SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE 
Affirmative Form
I am / I’m
Eu sou/estou
You are / You’re
Tu és/estás; Você é/está
He is / He’s
Ele é/está
She is / She’s
Ela é/está
It is / It’s
Ele/Ela/Isso é/está
We are / We’re
Nós somos/estamos
You are / You’re
Vós sois/estais; Vocês são/estão
They are / They’re
Eles/Elas são/estão
< voltar para o índice
15
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this case, there are two possible contractions: one between the subject and the verb to be, 
and the other one between the verb to be and the particle not. Notice that the f irst person 
singular is an exception: I’m not is the only contraction that is considered grammatically correct.
Now look at what happens in the interrogative form:
As you can see, we just invert the verb to be and the subject to form the interrogative form. Keep in mind that 
these conjugations are references to use the verb to be in the present with a subject pronoun. Sometimes, 
the subject is not a pronoun, but a noun. In this case, we will think of which subject pronoun is equivalent to 
that noun to know the correct conjugation.
SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE 
Negative Form
I am not / I’m not
Eu não sou/estou
You are not / You’re not / You aren’t 
Tu não és/estás; Você não é/está
He is not / He’s not / He isn’t
Ele não é/está
She is not / She’s not / She isn’t
Ela não é/está
It is not / It’s not / It isn’t
Ele/Ela/Isso não é/está
We are not / We’re not / We aren’t
Nós não somos/estamos
You are not / You’re not / You aren’t
Vós não sois/estais; Vocês não são/estão
They are not / They’re not / They aren’t 
Eles/Elas não são/estão
SIMPLE PRESENT – TO BE 
Interrogative Form
Am I…?
Eu sou/estou...?
Are you...?
Tu és/estás...?; Você é/está...?
Is he...?
Ele é/está...?
Is she...?
Ela é/está...?
Is it...?
Ele/Ela/Isso é/está...?
Are we...?
Nós somos/estamos...?
Are you...?
Vós sois/estais...?; Vocês são/estão...?
Are they...?
Eles/Elas são/estão...?
< voltar para o índice
16
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Let’s see this with some sentences. Check out this example:
The subject is the fitting room, which is a place in the singular, and the 
corresponding subject pronoun is it. The conjugation of the verb to be for this 
person is is, so: The fitting room is. 
Let’s see another one:
The subject is the home appliances, in the plural. That’s why we use the subject 
pronoun they to replace it. The corresponding conjugation is are. Thus: The 
home appliances are.
In these examples, we used the verb to be to talk about location. But if you don’t 
have that information, you can just ask a question using where. To do that, use 
the interrogative form. It will be like this:
The fitting room is upstairs.
O provador é/f ica no andar de cima.
It is upstairs.
Ele é/f ica no andar de cima.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS + TO BE
The home appliances are on aisle number 10. 
Os eletrodomésticos estão/f icam no corredor número 10. 
They are on aisle number 10.
Eles estão/f icam no corredor número 10.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS + TO BE
Where is the fitting room? 
Onde é/f ica o provador?
WHERE + INTERROGATIVE FORM
< voltar para o índice
17
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
We start the sentence with where, then we use the interrogative 
form of the verb to be, that is, verb + subject. In this case, the verb 
is is, and the subject is fitting room. 
To answer that question, we could say:
Upstairs. / It’s upstairs. 
No andar de cima. / Ele é/f ica no andar de cima. 
Notice that the answer is the location: upstairs. The complete answer may have 
the verb and the subject pronoun: It’s upstairs.
Let’s see one more example:
Again, to ask the question, we start with where, then add the verb and the subject. The answer 
will show the location: on aisle number 10. 
And since home appliances is in the plural, to use a subject pronoun and the verb, the complete 
answer would be: They are on aisle number 10. 
In these examples, the verb to be is the main verb, the verb that has the main idea we want to 
convey. But there are some situations in which the verb to be works as an auxiliary verb. It will be 
in the sentence just to help build the verb form, without carrying the main idea of the sentence. 
That is the case of the present continuous, for example. This verb form is used to express an 
action in progress at the moment of speaking. Since it is an action, the meaning of the sentence 
is carried by other verbs, and the verb to be will only be an auxiliary verb. 
Let’s take a look at an example:
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
I am looking for the electronics section. 
Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos.
Where are the home appliances? 
Onde estão/f icam os eletrodomésticos? 
On aisle number 10. / They are on aisle number 10. 
No corredor número 10. / Eles estão/f icam no corredor número 10.
WHERE + INTERROGATIVE FORM
< voltar para o índice
18
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Affirmative Form
 Subject + Verb To Be + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement
 Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
In this sentence, the main verb is to look for. Notice that the verb has a suffix, -ING, so it 
becomes looking. The suff ix -ING conveys the idea of continuity to the verb. And the verb 
to be just helps compose this verb form. Since it is an action in progress at the moment of 
speaking, the verb to be is conjugated in the present: I am.
The basic structure of the present continuous is quite simple. Have a look: 
 Affirmative Form
The customer is browsing around the store. 
O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja.
The conjugation of the verb to be will change depending on the 
subject. Check out this example:
 Negative Form
Subject + Verb To Be + Not + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo To Be + Not + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
The customer is the subject, immediately followed by the verb to be conjugated in the 
third person singular, is; then we have the main verb browse in the -ING form, and the 
complement, around the store.
Now, look at the negative form:
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
< voltar para o índice
19
Chapter 1 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideoScript
< voltar para o índice
20
In this chapter, we talked about the simple present of the verb to be, the 
present continuous, the subject pronouns, and the question word where. 
If you want to learn more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar 
Guide section at the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Present Continuous Page 251 w
Question Word Where Page 270 w
Simple Present – Verb To Be Page 316 w
Spelling Rules – -ING form Page 320 w
Subject Pronouns Page 323 w
Interrogative Form
Verb To Be + Subject + Main Verb In The -ING Form + Complement
Verbo To Be + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
Notice that the contracted form will be quite common in spoken English. 
Finally, take a look at the interrogative form:
Interrogative Form
Is the customer browsing around the store?
O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja?
In the interrogative, we just invert the position of the verb to be and the subject. For example:
So, we just add not after the verb To Be. For example:
Negative Form
The customer is not (isn’t) browsing around the store. 
O cliente não está dando uma olhada na loja.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 1 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Write ( 1 ) if the verb to be is the main verb of the sentence, and ( 2 ) if it’s an auxiliary verb.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.
a) The fitting room upstairs.
 O provador é/fica no andar de cima.
b) are on aisle number 10.
 Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.
c) are the home appliances? 
 Onde estão/ficam os eletrodomésticos? 
d) for the electronics section.
 Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos
a) The electronics are on the third floor.
 Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar. 
b) The fitting room is upstairs.
 O provador é/fica no andar de cima. 
c) The customer is browsing around the store.
 O cliente está dando uma olhada na loja. 
d) They are on aisle number 10.
 Eles estão/ficam no corredor número 10.
e) Where are the home appliances?
 Onde estão/ficam os eletrodomésticos? 
f) I am looking for the electronics section.
 Eu estou procurando pela seção de eletrônicos.
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
< voltar para o índice
21
Chapter 1 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
Activity A – Answers
a. 1
b. 1
c. 2
d. 1
e. 1
f. 2
Activity B – Answers
a. is
b. They
c. Where
d. I am (I’m) looking
e. is not (isn’t) browsing
f. are
e) The customer around the store. 
 O cliente não está dando uma olhada na loja. 
f) The electronics on the third floor. 
 Os eletrônicos estão/ficam no terceiro andar.
< voltar para o índice
22
Return Policy.
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Amy and Lucas are at a store, close to the customer service area]
Lucas:
So, as we said before, the U.S. really is a shopper’s paradise! So you 
might as well just go crazy!
Amy:
Well...until you get home, get a grip on yourself and start to regret how 
much you bought! There’s actually an American term for this: it’s called 
“buyer’s remorse”!
Lucas:
Or maybe you go home, and you realize that what you bought isn’t 
working properly. Or maybe the clothes that you got aren’t f itting as well 
as you thought they would. Whatever your reason, return policies in the 
U.S. are actually pretty simple. Generally, there’s a 30-day return policy, 
but, ultimately, it’s at the store’s discretion.
Amy:
So, most American retailers do have pretty lenient return policies, and 
they’re often described on the bottom of your receipt, or the back of 
you receipt. They’re so focused on customer service and making the 
customers happy, that they’re going to be pretty accommodating about 
your needs.
Lucas:
Yeah, in fact, most international visitors are really surprised with how 
easy it is to return goods in the United States. I mean, most stores are 
not even going to ask you any questions, except for: “Why are you 
returning this product?”
RETURN POLICY
In this chapter, you are going to learn how to exchange or return a product and 
what to say in such situations. Besides that, you will also see some language 
items to help you improve your language skills. 
Now look at the script of Return Policy.
24
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Well, they’re not asking you to determine whether or not they’ll take it 
back; they’re just asking because they want to know if it’s ready to be 
put back on the shelf or if there’s something wrong with it.
Lucas:
Now, here is a piece of advice, and it’s very important: keep your receipt! 
Now, just because you don’t have your receipt, it doesn’t necessarily 
mean that the store isn’t going to accept your return.
Amy:
Yes, that’s right! They’ll probably still process the return, but they might 
give you store credit, say, instead of cashback.
Lucas:
Right; and because it’s relatively easy to do returns in the United States, 
some people have been, well...taking advantage of the system, or 
abusing the system. And by “abusing the system”, what I mean is, for 
example: let’s say somebody has a wedding to go to on Sunday; well, 
they buy something, wear it to that wedding on Sunday, and then, on 
Monday, they return it to the store to get a refund.
Amy:
Well, that’s why some stores have had to implement some restrictions. 
So they want to make sure that you’re returning the item because you 
regret the purchase or something’s not working properly with it.
[Interviewing a customer service representative]
Amy:
So, we’re here with Loryann, who is a customer service rep here at the 
store, and we’re going to talk to her about the store return policy.
Lucas:
Yes, so what’s the general return policy that you have here?
Loryann:
The general return policy is: anything without a receipt for 30 days, you 
can get store credit.
Lucas:
Got it!
25
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Loryann:
And also, with the return, if they return something and don’t have the 
receipt, we can look it up under their credit card. They swipe their credit 
card and we can look it up and it’ll come up on the screen when they 
purchased it, here at this store, or at all.
Lucas:
Oh, wow!
Amy:
Does it have to be returned at the same location?
Loryann:
No, absolutely not.
Lucas:
Is there a difference when it’s from a different department? For instance: 
electronics.
Loryann:
Electronics, some of the items, you have 15 days. TVs and computers, 
you have 90 days, but anything else is 15 days!
Lucas:
Something from the electronics department that’s been opened, does 
that change the return policy?
Loryann:
Yes, it does. Without a receipt, you won’t be able to exchange it. If it’s 
opened and you have a receipt, you can exchange it for the same item!
Lucas:
Great! So there are a lot of differences in terms of departments. It’s 
important to really know what the different policies are in terms of 
returns and exchanges, and to always, always, always keep your receipt. 
Alright, thank you!
Loryann
You’re welcome!
26
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Amy e Lucas estão numa loja, perto da área de atendimento ao 
cliente]
Lucas:
Como já mencionamos, os EUA realmente são o paraíso para quem 
curte compras! Então, o melhor é aproveitar!
Amy:
Bem... até você voltar pra casa, pensar melhor e começar a se 
arrepender do tanto que comprou. Temos até um termo nos EUA para 
isso: chama-se “remorso de comprador”!
Lucas:
Ou talvez você tenha chegado em casa e notado que algo não está 
funcionando direito, ou que as roupas que você comprou não serviram 
tão bem assim. Qualquer que seja o seu motivo, as políticas de 
devolução nos EUA sãobem simples. Geralmente, a política é que a 
devolução pode ser feita em até 30 dias, mas, no f inal das contas, isso 
f ica a critério da loja.
Amy:
A maioria das lojas americanas tem políticas de devolução bem 
permissíveis, que geralmente são descritas na parte inferior ou no verso 
da sua nota f iscal. Elas são tão centradas em atender e satisfazer o 
cliente, que vão tentar resolver seus problemas e necessidades.
Lucas:
Sim, na verdade a maioria dos turistas internacionais f icam surpresos 
com a facilidade de se fazer uma devolução nos Estados Unidos. A 
maioria das lojas nem vai fazer muitas perguntas, exceto, talvez, para 
saber o motivo da devolução.
Amy:
Eles não vão perguntar isso para decidir se aceitam ou não a devolução, 
mas somente para saber se o produto pode ser colocado novamente à 
venda na prateleira ou se há algo de errado com ele.
Lucas:
Aqui vai um conselho muito importante: guarde sua nota f iscal! Mas, se 
você não a tiver mais, isso não quer dizer necessariamente que a loja 
não vai aceitar a devolução.
POLÍTICA DE DEVOLUÇÃO
27
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Isso mesmo! Eles provavelmente ainda vão processar a devolução, mas 
você talvez receba crédito na loja, em vez do dinheiro de volta.
Lucas:
Exato; e como é relativamente fácil fazer devoluções nos Estados 
Unidos, algumas pessoas têm se aproveitado ou abusado do sistema. O 
que quero dizer com isso é, por exemplo: se alguém tem um casamento 
para ir no domingo, compra algo para usar no dia, para, então, na 
segunda, devolver o artigo na loja e pegar o reembolso.
Amy:
É por isso que algumas lojas implementaram algumas restrições. Elas 
querem ter certeza de que você está devolvendo o artigo por ter se 
arrependido da compra ou por haver algo de “errado” com ele.
[Entrevistando uma representante do atendimento ao cliente]
Amy:
Estamos aqui com a Loryann, que trabalha com atendimento ao 
cliente aqui na loja, e vamos conversar com ela sobre sua política de 
devoluções.
Lucas:
Qual é a política geral para devoluções que vocês têm aqui?
Loryann:
A política geral é aceitar devoluções em até 30 dias, com a nota f iscal. 
Qualquer coisa após isso, e sem a nota, a pessoa ganha crédito na loja.
Lucas:
Entendi! 
Loryann:
E com a devolução, se alguém trouxer algo sem a nota, podemos 
procurá-la pelo cartão de crédito. Eles passam o cartão, e podemos 
procurar e achar quando a compra foi feita, se foi feita na loja, ou se ela 
sequer foi feita.
Lucas:
Caramba!
Amy:
A devolução precisa ser feita na mesma loja?
28
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Loryann:
Não, de forma alguma.
Lucas:
Existe alguma diferença se a compra for de outro departamento... Por 
exemplo: eletrônicos?
Loryann:
Para alguns artigos eletrônicos, o prazo é de 15 dias. Para TVs e 
computadores, o prazo é de 90 dias, mas, para qualquer outro artigo, 
são 15 dias!
Lucas:
Caso algum eletrônico tenha sido aberto, isso pode interferir na sua 
devolução?
Loryann:
Sim, pode! Sem a nota f iscal, não será possível fazer a troca. Caso esteja 
aberto e você tenha a nota, você pode trocá-lo pelo mesmo artigo.
Lucas:
Ótimo! Há muitas diferenças entre os departamentos; logo, é importante 
que você conheça as diferentes políticas para trocas e devoluções, e 
sempre, sempre, sempre guarde a nota f iscal! OK, obrigado!
Loryann:
De nada!
29
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 2 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Return and refund policies in the U.S. are usually thought and adjusted to make 
the client happy. Let’s see some common policies: 
But those are possibilities, not rules. Each store has its own policy, and they are 
usually found at the bottom or on the back of the receipt or on the store website. 
If you are not happy with a product, look for a customer service representative 
at the store and say:
I’d like to return this product, please. 
Eu gostaria de devolver este produto, por favor. 
And they will probably ask:
Why are you returning it? 
Por que você o está devolvendo? 
You can exchange the product for the same item.
Você pode trocar o produto por outro igual. 
You can exchange the product for a different item. 
Você pode trocar o produto por um artigo diferente. 
You can return the product.
Você pode devolver o produto. 
You get a refund or cashback.
Você recebe um reembolso ou o dinheiro de volta. 
You get store credit.
Você recebe crédito na loja.
30
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
They want to know if the product needs repairing or if it can go straight back to 
the shelf. So here is what you can answer:
Note that all the answers start with because. That is how we 
answer a question with why.
If you just want to get another product, then you need to use the 
verb to exchange. Check it out:
And they will still probably want to know your reasons for that by asking:
Then you will have to explain the problem. You can do that by saying:
Because I regret the purchase. 
Porque eu me arrependi da compra.
Because it didn’t meet my expectations. 
Porque ele não atendeu às minhas expectativas.
Because I didn’t adapt to it. 
Porque eu não me adaptei a ele. 
I’d like to exchange this product, please. 
Eu gostaria de trocar este produto, por favor. 
Because it didn’t fit me. 
Porque não me serviu. 
It’s not working properly. 
Não está funcionando direito. 
Why do you wish to exchange it? 
Por que você deseja trocá-lo? 
What’s wrong with it?
O que tem/há de errado com ele? 
31
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
For faulty products, check if they have warranty. In this document, you can f ind 
the coverage policies and warranty extension. 
But, warranty or not, the store needs to confirm you have recently bought the 
product there. So, they may ask:
In most cases, if you are returning it within 30 days since 
the purchase, they will conclude the transaction. Or they 
may ask you how you paid for that:
In this case, you may answer:
If you don’t have the receipt, they will probably ask you:
Did you bring the receipt?
Você trouxe a nota f iscal? 
When did you buy it? 
Quando você o comprou? 
Did you buy it with your credit card? 
Você o comprou com cartão de crédito? 
Yesterday. / Last week. / Three days ago. 
Ontem. / Semana passada. / Há três dias. 
32
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Now you know what to do if you need to return or 
exchange a product.
So, remember to:
Always keep the receipt. 
Sempre guarde a nota f iscal. 
Keep the warranty too. 
Guarde a garantia também.
You may not get cashback.
É possível que você não receba o seu dinheiro de volta. 
You may have to exchange it only for the same product. 
É possível que você só possa trocar o produto por outro igual. 
They do so because they can swipe your credit card and f ind your 
purchase in the system, and then confirm the information. But if 
you used a different payment method, not having the receipt cuts 
down your options: 
33
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
3 / 11 / 5 / 2 / 8 / 10 / 
12 / 4 / 1 / 7 / 6 / 9
Activity B – Answers
a. Why
b. regret
c. working
d. exchange
e. cashback
f. receipt
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) To exchange a product
( 2 ) To return a product
( 3 ) Cashback 
( 4 ) Store credit 
( 5 ) Purchase 
( 6 ) Receipt 
( 7 ) Warranty
( 8 ) Expectations 
( 9 ) To f it 
( 10 ) Product 
( 11 ) Credit card 
( 12 ) To regret
( ) Dinheiro de volta
( ) Cartão de crédito
( ) Compra( ) Devolver um produto 
( ) Expectativas
( ) Produto
( ) Arrepender-se
( ) Crédito na loja 
( ) Trocar um produto 
( ) Garantia 
( ) Nota fiscal
( ) Servir
a) are you returning it?
 Por que você o está devolvendo? 
b) Because I the purchase. 
 Porque eu me arrependi da compra.
c) It’s not properly. 
 Não está funcionando direito. 
d) You can the product for the 
 same item.
 Você pode trocar o produto por outro igual.
 
e) You get a refund or .
 Você recebe um reembolso ou o dinheiro de 
 volta.
f) Always keep the .
 Sempre guarde a nota fiscal.
34
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we will talk about the simple present of other verbs, adverbs of 
frequency, and the question words how, when, and why.
Let’s start by reviewing the basic structure for affirmative sentences: 
This is the basic structure used for the simple present. It is the verb form we use to 
talk about facts, routine, and habits. 
Even though the basic structure of the sentence remains the same, the verb 
conjugation will change a bit. 
As we have seen, the conjugation of the verb to be is the most irregular one. However, 
when we conjugate other verbs in the simple present, there will be differences only for 
the third person singular. 
Let’s take the verb to vary, for example:
Affirmative Form
Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento
BASIC SENTENCE STRUCTURE
TO VARY
Variar
I vary 
You vary
He/She/It varies
We vary
You vary
They vary
35
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Note that the conjugation doesn’t change with the pronouns I, you, we, and they. 
But the verb conjugation for the third person singular (the pronouns he, she, and 
it) will be varies, changing the -Y for the suff ix -IES.
Now, let’s analyze the verb to get:
Once again, the conjugation only changes in the third person singular. In this 
case, we only add -s to the verb, so it becomes gets.
Now, let’s see some examples in the simple present:
Here, the subject is return policies, which is third person plural, equivalent to 
the pronoun they. The main verb is vary. When we conjugate it, there are no 
changes: the verb is in its base form. 
Now, look at an example in the third person singular:
TO GET 
Receber; Pegar
I get 
You get
He/She/It gets
We get
You get
They get
Affirmative Form
Return policies vary among stores.
As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas.
Affirmative Form
The customer gets a refund within 10 days.
O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.
SIMPLE PRESENT
SIMPLE PRESENT
36
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Now, the subject is the customer. If we replace it with a subject pronoun, we will use he or she. 
Then the subject is equivalent to the third person singular. So, we add -s to the main verb: gets. 
Let’s see what happens in the negative form now. Take a look at the general structure: 
Notice that with all the verbs in the simple present, except for the verb to be, we will use the 
auxiliary verb do. 
It is important to realize that the auxiliary verb do does not add any meaning to the sentence, 
since it doesn’t actually have any meaning. It is just a tool to make the negative form. 
Let’s turn the examples in the aff irmative form to negative sentences to observe the difference:
To make the sentence negative, we use the auxiliary verb do + not before the 
main verb, which is kept in its base form. We can also use the contracted form 
don’t. 
Now, pay close attention to this example in the third person singular:
Negative Form
Subject + Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Main Verb + Complement 
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar Do + Not (Don’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Negative Form 
Return policies do not (don’t) vary among stores.
As políticas de devolução não variam entre as lojas.
SIMPLE PRESENT
SIMPLE PRESENT
Negative Form 
The customer does not (doesn’t) get a refund within 10 days.
O cliente não recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.
SIMPLE PRESENT
37
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this case, the auxiliary verb will be conjugated, so it becomes does + not or, in 
its contracted form, doesn’t. The main verb will remain in the base form. That is, 
there is no suff ix added to the verb here. 
To make the interrogative form of the simple present, the auxiliary verb, not the 
main verb, goes before the subject. Let’s see the general structure:
Have a look at the example: 
So, we place the auxiliary verb in the beginning; then, we add the subject and 
the main verb.
When the subject is he, she, or it, we will follow the same logic by using the 
auxiliary verb does and the main verb in the base form. For example:
Interrogative Form 
Auxiliary Verb Do + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Verbo Auxiliar Do + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Interrogative Form 
Do return policies vary among stores?
As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas?
SIMPLE PRESENT
SIMPLE PRESENT
Interrogative Form 
Does the customer get a refund within 10 days?
O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias?
SIMPLE PRESENT
38
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Since the simple present is used to refer to habits and routines, adverbs of frequency are 
commonly used with this verb form. 
Take a look at some of them: 
Adverbs of frequency express how often something happens. Take a 
look at some examples: 
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY 
American stores usually accept returns and exchanges. 
Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas. 
SIMPLE PRESENT AND ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Never
Nunca
Rarely
Raramente
Always 
Sempre
Usually
Geralmente 
Sometimes
Às vezes
Often 
Frequentemente / Com 
frequência / Muitas vezes
Note that this sentence is in the simple present, and that the position of the 
adverb of frequency usually is right before the main verb accept. That happens 
with every other verb except the verb to be. Take a look:
In this sentence, the main verb is to be: are. Notice that the adverb of frequency comes after it.
We can use adverbs of frequency with other verb forms too. Check it out:
Return policies are often at the end of the receipt. 
Muitas vezes, as políticas de devolução estão no f inal da nota f iscal.
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY AND SIMPLE PRESENT
39
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
How often do you go to the mall? 
Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center?
Every weekend. / Once a month. / On Fridays.
Todo f inal de semana. / Uma vez por mês. / Às sextas.
This sentence is in the imperative form, so the subject is omitted. In this case, 
the position of the adverb of frequency is before the main verb.
If we want to ask a question about frequency, we will have to use a variation of 
the question word how, which is How often. Look at this example:
Pay attention to the structure: we start with How often, then we use the 
interrogative form of the sentence. In this example, we are using the 
interrogative form of the simple present: do you go shopping.
Now, it is important not to confuse how often with when. How often is a 
question word used to ask about how frequently something happens, and 
when is used to ask a question about the specific moment in which something 
happens. Check this out:
HOW OFTEN
Frequency
How often do you go shopping?
Com que frequência você faz compras?
HOW OFTEN + INTERROGATIVE FORM
Here, we are referring to the frequency with which you go to the mall, so the 
possible answers will also indicate the frequency. 
Now, compare with an example with the questionword when:
Always keep the receipt. 
Sempre guarde a nota f iscal.
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY AND IMPERATIVE FORM
40
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Why are you returning this product? 
Por que você está devolvendo este produto? 
Because I regret the purchase. 
Porque eu me arrependi da compra. 
Now the question refers to the specific moment when something will happen; 
that’s why the possible answers will indicate a date. 
Why is another important question word. It is used to ask about the reason 
for something to happen. And the answer to a question with why starts with 
because. Let’s see some examples:
Here, they want to know the reason behind your decision to return the product. 
And, to ask this question, we’ll start with why and add the interrogative form. In 
this case, the interrogative form of the present continuous. Notice that we use 
why in the question and because in the answer.
Now, let’s see an example in the simple present:
Once again, we are using Why + the interrogative form to ask the question. 
As for the answer, we start it with Because.
WHY AND BECAUSE
Reason
When are you going to the mall?
Quando você vai ao shopping center? 
Later. / Tomorrow. / Next week.
Mais tarde. / Amanhã. / Semana que vem.
WHEN
Specific moment
Why do you wish to exchange this product? 
Por que você deseja trocar este produto? 
Because it’s not working properly. 
Porque não está funcionando direito. 
WHY AND BECAUSE
Reason
41
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Now you know how to use the simple present, talk about frequency, 
and ask questions using the question words how often, when, and 
why. For more details about these topics, take a look at the Grammar 
Guide section at the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Adverbs of Frequency Page 189 w
Question Word How Page 254 w
Question Word When Page 267 w
Question Word Why Page 284 w
Simple Present – Other Verbs Page 310 w
< voltar para o índice
4242
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 2 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Choose the correct option to complete the sentence according to the translation.
a) American stores accept returns and exchanges. 
 Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas. 
 ( ) usually
 ( ) never
b) are you going to the mall? 
 Quando você vai ao shopping center? 
 ( ) When
 ( ) How often
c) Return policies are at the end of the receipt. 
 Muitas vezes, as políticas de devolução estão no final da nota fiscal. 
 ( ) often
 ( ) sometimes
d) do you go to the mall? 
 Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center?
 ( ) When
 ( ) How often
e) keep the receipt. 
 Sempre guarde a nota fiscal. 
 ( ) Never
 ( ) Always
43
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 2 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
A
ct
iv
ity
 A
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 u
su
al
ly
b.
 W
he
n
c.
 o
fte
n
d.
 H
ow
 o
fte
n
e.
 A
lw
ay
s
f. 
W
hy
A
ct
iv
ity
 B
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 v
ar
y
b.
 g
et
s/
re
ce
iv
es
 
c.
 d
oe
s 
no
t (
do
es
n’
t)
 g
et
 / 
re
ce
iv
e 
d.
 a
cc
ep
t
e.
 d
o 
yo
u 
go
f. 
do
 y
ou
 w
is
h 
/ d
o 
yo
u 
w
an
t 
f) do you wish to exchange this product? 
 Por que você deseja trocar este produto? 
 ( ) Because
 ( ) Why
a) Return policies among stores.
 As políticas de devolução variam entre as lojas.
b) The customer a refund within 10 days.
 O cliente recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.
c) The customer a refund within 10 days.
 O cliente não recebe um reembolso dentro de 10 dias.
d) American stores usually returns and exchanges. 
 Lojas americanas geralmente aceitam devoluções e trocas. 
e) How often to the mall? 
 Com que frequência você vai ao shopping center? 
f) Why to exchange this product? 
 Por que você deseja trocar este produto? 
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.
44
< voltar para o índice
Shopping 
for Clothes.
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[At a store]
Amy:
So, you want to go shopping for clothes. In the U.S., there are so many 
options and so many different price points that you can shop at! You can 
f ind clothes everywhere, from gas stations to big chain stores like this 
one! Stores like this will sell groceries, clothing, even furniture, and pet 
supplies, or car parts! You won’t f ind designer clothes here, but you will 
f ind quality T-shirts, pants, scarves, and swimsuits for as low as US$5!
[On a street downtown]
Lucas:
And, of course, as one would expect, clothes are sold in good clothing 
stores, but also in malls! The advantage of going to a mall, of course, is 
that they’re very accessible, as they’re often located in tourist places. 
Clothing stores in malls sell a variety of brands, and they always have 
the latest collections.
Amy:
So, if you are here to shop, but you’re looking for designer items at 
a low, low price, you’ll have to look up outlet malls, which are one of 
my favorite places in the world! Outlet malls are a collection of outlet 
stores that sell designer and name-brand items at a discount, but the 
only downside is they are usually about a 50-minute drive from any 
metropolitan center. So, depending on what cities you’re traveling to, 
you can start researching what outlet malls are around, how to get 
there, and often times they have email lists that you can sign up for, and 
they will send you coupons for up to 50% off your f inal purchase price. 
That’s 50% off on already discounted prices! What can beat that?
SHOPPING FOR CLOTHES
In the United States, you can buy clothes not only at specialty stores, but also at 
supermarkets, convenience stores, and even drugstores. In this chapter, we will 
show you some vocabulary that is very useful in this situation. You will also learn 
some language items that will help you improve your English skills.
Now look at the script of Shopping for Clothes.
46
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lucas:
Now, if real cheap is what you’re looking for, then there’s still some other 
options for you! And I mean cheap! Cheaper than the outlet stores! In 
some stores, they specialize in selling collection leftovers. And the good 
news is that these stores are located all over town, even in tourist spots! 
So, I recommend that you go to these stores! And take your time looking 
through them, because, at f irst glance, you know, you might notice that 
they might not have as big of a selection, or they might be a little bit 
messy, but trust me! Take your time, look through that stuff, because I 
guarantee that you’re going to f ind something that’s exactly what you’re 
looking for!
[On Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
But if you’re looking for the latest collections at high-end designer 
stores, this is your place! Rodeo Drive!
[Interviewing a clothes salesperson]
Amy:
Hi! We’re here with Angela, and she’s going to talk to us a little bit about 
shopping in America. Specif ically, clothing shopping! What are some 
places that you can go, from low-end to high-end?
Angela: 
Well, there’s the whole Rodeo Drive area, where it’s much high-end 
stuff. And then there are consignment stores and thrift stores, which are 
clothes that are being resold. And then there’s in the middle, which is 
right in middle of both of those, which is brand-new clothes that aren’t 
previously worn, but they’re not high-end brands.
Amy:
Can you explain what consignment stores are, just in case our viewers 
don’t know them?
Angela: 
Totally! A consignment store is a store that is reselling clothes that 
were previously worn, like a used bookstore. But they usually shouldn’t 
be dirty. They’re usually clean, good clothes; sometimeseven brand 
clothing is sold at these consignment stores, but probably for a third of 
the price you would get for them on the real rack.
Amy:
There are other options too. Like, outlets, right?
47
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Angela: 
Yes, there are outlets that are brands that are doing half-sale options, 
and those are all over! Probably even more than the high-end stores are 
the outlets. 
Amy:
If you had one word of advice about shopping for clothes in the U.S. for 
our viewers, what would you say? 
Angela: 
It would be never buying at the retail price! You can always f ind better!
Amy:
Same! Yes, thank you!
Angela: 
You’re welcome!
[Em uma loja]
Amy:
Então, você quer comprar roupas. Nos EUA, há muitas opções e faixas 
de preço para você fazer compras! Você pode achar roupas em qualquer 
lugar, desde o posto de gasolina, até grandes cadeias de lojas como 
esta! Lojas como esta vendem alimentos, roupas, móveis, artigos para 
animais de estimação e até mesmo peças de carro! Você não vai achar 
roupas de grife aqui, mas vai conseguir achar camisetas de qualidade, 
calças, cachecóis e trajes de banho por preços a partir de US$5!
[Em uma rua no centro da cidade]
Lucas:
Como você pode imaginar, roupas também são vendidas em lojas 
especializadas, assim como em shoppings! A vantagem de ir a um 
shopping é que eles são muito acessíveis e geralmente f icam próximos 
a pontos turísticos. Lojas de roupas em shoppings vendem várias 
marcas e sempre terão as coleções mais recentes.
COMPRANDO ROUPAS
48
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Mas se você está aqui para fazer compras e procura artigos de grife com 
preços muito, muito baixos, você terá que encontrar um outlet, que é 
um dos meus lugares preferidos no mundo! Shoppings de outlets são 
um conjunto de lojas de outlet que vendem artigos de grifes e marcas 
famosas com descontos. O único ponto negativo é que eles geralmente 
f icam a 50 minutos de carro de qualquer centro metropolitano. Logo, 
dependendo da cidade onde estiver, você pode pesquisar quais outlets 
se encontram nas redondezas, como chegar lá, e muitas vezes eles têm 
listas de e-mail em que você pode se cadastrar para receber cupons de 
até 50% de desconto no preço f inal! São 50% de desconto sobre os 
preços que já estavam com desconto! O que pode ser melhor do que 
isso?
Lucas:
Agora, se é algo realmente barato o que você procura, então ainda 
temos outras opções para você! E estou falando de barato mesmo! Mais 
barato do que os outlets! Algumas lojas são especializadas em vender 
sobras de coleções. E a notícia boa é que essas lojas são encontradas 
por toda a cidade, inclusive em pontos turísticos. Por isso eu recomendo 
que você vá! E vasculhe essas lojas sem pressa, porque, à primeira vista, 
você pode notar que elas não têm tanta variedade ou podem ser um 
pouco bagunçadas, mas confie em mim! Dê uma olhada nas peças com 
calma, porque eu garanto que você vai encontrar exatamente o que 
procura!
[Na Rodeo Drive]
Amy:
Mas se você está à procura das últimas coleções e roupas de grife da 
melhor qualidade, aqui é o seu lugar! Rodeo Drive!
[Entrevistando uma vendedora de roupas]
Amy:
Oi! Estamos aqui com a Angela, que vai conversar um pouco com a 
gente sobre fazer compras nos Estados Unidos e, mais especif icamente, 
sobre comprar roupas! A quais lugares se pode ir, desde o mais barato 
até o mais caro?
Angela:
Há toda a região da Rodeo Drive, onde temos as coisas mais caras. E há 
também as lojas de consignação e brechós, que trabalham com roupas 
usadas. E temos o meio-termo entre essas opções, que são roupas 
novas em folha, que nunca foram usadas, mas que não são de grife. 
49
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Você poderia explicar o que são lojas de consignação?
Angela:
Claro! Uma loja de consignação é uma loja que revende roupas que 
já tenham sido usadas, tal qual um sebo. Mas elas geralmente estão 
limpas! Geralmente são roupas boas e limpas. Às vezes, roupas de 
marca podem ser vendidas nessas lojas, mas por um terço do preço que 
você pagaria por elas nas araras originais.
Amy:
Temos outras opções também, como outlets, por exemplo?
Angela:
Sim, há outlets de marcas que vendem pela metade do preço, e eles 
estão por toda parte! Provavelmente existem mais outlets do que lojas 
de grife.
Amy:
Que conselho você daria para quem está nos assistindo e quer comprar 
roupas nos Estados Unidos?
Angela:
Nunca pague o preço cheio! Você sempre pode achar um preço melhor!
Amy:
Exato! Obrigada!
Angela:
De nada!
50
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 3 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
The shopping mall, or more commonly, just mall, is the name of the place we can go to buy 
something. If you want to say that you are going there, you say:
The word shopping is a verb, an action that you do; it’s not a 
place. So you cannot say: 
If you are looking for women’s clothes, you will f ind: 
I’m going to the mall. 
Eu vou ao shopping.
Dress
Vestido
WOMEN’S WARDROBE
Skirt 
Saia 
Miniskirt 
Minissaia
I’m going to the shopping. 
Eu vou ao shopping.
I’m going shopping at the mall. 
Eu vou fazer compras no shopping (center). 
51
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
And here are some pieces of men’s wardrobe:
Polo shirt
Camisa polo
MEN’S WARDROBE
Suit
Terno 
Dress shirt 
Camisa social
Pajamas / PJs
Pijama
Long skirt
Saia longa
T-shirt 
Camiseta
Blouse 
Blusa feminina
A pair of jeans 
Um par de calças jeans 
Pants / A pair of pants 
Calças / Um par de calças
Nightgown 
Camisola
52
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Panties / A pair of panties
Calcinha
UNDERWEAR
Bra 
Sutiã 
Briefs / A pair of briefs 
Cueca slip
Boxer / Boxer shorts
Cueca samba-canção
Boxer Briefs
Cueca boxer
As for underwear, here is what you may buy:
This vocabulary is also used for kids’ clothing. 
If you need help to f ind what you want, you can ask the salesperson: 
Excuse me. I’m looking for skirts. 
Com licença. Eu estou procurando por saias.
Notice that both examples show situations in which you approach the salesperson, so it is 
important to start with Excuse me.
Then, to ask for something, all you have to do is change the item for 
the one you are looking for. For example:
I’m looking for skirts/dresses/pants. 
Excuse me. Do you have dresses? 
Com licença. Vocês têm vestidos? 
53
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
The same applies for the other sentence construction:
If you go to a boutique or a fancy store, the salesperson will approach 
you f irst, and they will probably say:
It is considered polite to accept their offer. If you do, the following 
conversation is likely to take place:
Or whichever other piece of clothing you want. Or you could choose 
to say the sentence: 
Or whichever piece of clothing you wish.
Do you have dresses?
Vocês têm vestidos? 
May I help you?
Posso te ajudar?
Do you have dresses/skirts/pants? 
Yes, please. 
Sim, por favor.
I’m looking for dresses. 
Eu estou procurando por vestidos.
Are you looking for anything in particular? 
Você está procurando por alguma coisa em particular?
May I help you?
Posso te ajudar?
54
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
They may also ask you about pattern:
And you can tell them what your favorites are:
Then they will probably get some pieces they think you will like. 
Take a look at what they may say:
What kind of pattern do you like? 
De que tipo de estampa você gosta? 
You should try this flowered silk skirt. 
Você deveria experimentar essa saia f lorida de seda.I prefer it solid/checkered/striped. 
Eu prefiro lisa/xadrez/listrada. 
Now you know specific vocabulary to go shopping for 
clothes in the U.S. and the possible interactions you may 
have with the salesperson. 
 Why don’t you try this denim dress?
Por que você não experimenta esse vestido jeans?
And you can answer:
I prefer denim/silk/cotton. 
Eu prefiro jeans/seda/algodão.
The salesperson will probably ask questions about your style and 
preferences to f ind pieces you will like. So they may ask:
What kind of fabric do you prefer? 
Que tipo de tecido você prefere? 
55
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
3 / 5 / 12 / 6 / 11 / 10 / 
2 / 9 / 8 / 1 / 4 / 7
Activity B – Answers
a. skirts
b. dresses
c. fabric
d. pattern
e. silk
f. denim
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Dress
( 2 ) T-shirt
( 3 ) Dress shirt
( 4 ) Women’s wardrobe
( 5 ) Blouse 
( 6 ) Pants
( 7 ) Suit
( 8 ) Nightgown
( 9 ) Underwear
( 10 ) Panties 
( 11 ) Bra
( 12 ) Pajamas
( ) Camisa social
( ) Blusa feminina
( ) Pijama
( ) Calças 
( ) Sutiã
( ) Calcinha
( ) Camiseta
( ) Roupa íntima
( ) Camisola
( ) Vestido
( ) Vestuário feminino
( ) Terno
a) Excuse me. I’m looking for . 
 Com licença. Eu estou procurando por saias. 
b) Excuse me. Do you have ?
 Com licença. Vocês têm vestidos? 
c) What kind of do you 
 prefer? 
 Que tipo de tecido você prefere? 
d) What kind of do you like? 
 De que tipo de estampa você gosta? 
e) You should try this flowered 
 skirt. 
 Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida 
 de seda. 
f) Why don’t you try this 
 dress? 
 Por que você não experimenta esse vestido 
 jeans? 
56
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we are going to talk about the present continuous, the be going to structure, the 
question word what, the modal verb should, and the contraction of verbs.
We already know that the present continuous is used to talk about situations in progress at the 
present moment. But we can also use this verb form to talk about the future, be it in the form of 
arrangements or plans. We can say, for example:
In this sentence, the adverb of time next month shows that the situation is still 
going to happen. In this context, this verb form does not express continuity, but 
refers to a planned future action.
There is a third use for the present continuous that refers to an action that is going 
to happen really soon. For instance: 
It is quite clear that you will be leaving for the mall in a few minutes. There is no 
adverb of time to make it absolutely clear, but we can understand from the context 
that we are talking about a future action. 
I’m traveling to the United States next month to do some shopping. 
Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês que vem para fazer umas compras. 
I’m going to the mall. 
Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping. 
PRESENT CONTINUOUS 
Future
PRESENT CONTINUOUS 
Future
57
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Let’s see how to form the present continuous: 
Bear in mind that the verb to be in the present continuous works as an auxiliary 
verb, and that it must be conjugated in the present. The suff ix -ING will be 
added to the main verb, not to the verb to be. 
There is another structure we can use to talk about actions in the future. It is 
sometimes confused with the present continuous—the structure be going to. 
The confusion happens because the verb to go in this structure is used in the 
-ING form, and it looks like the present continuous. But this combination is just 
an auxiliary that follows the main verb. Let’s see some examples and compare: 
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Affirmative Form
Subject + Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement 
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
Negative Form
Subject + Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Not + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Not + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
Interrogative Form
Auxiliary Verb (To Be) + Subject + Main Verb (In The -ING Form) + Complement
Verbo Auxiliar To Be + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na forma -ING + Complemento
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
I’m going to the mall. 
Eu estou indo ao shopping.
58
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The subject here is I. The verb to be is am, even though it is contracted with the 
subject. And the main verb is go in the -ING form. So, this sentence is in the 
present continuous. 
Now, look at this one:
The main action is buy. The expression be going to, conjugated as am going to, 
according to the subject I, shows that the action is future. The main verb of this 
sentence is buy, which is in the base form. 
We can also use be going to with go as the main verb. It may sound weird to 
use the same verb twice in a sentence, but it is grammatically correct. 
Check it out: 
We used be going to and the main verb go. And there is another way to use it, 
take a look:
Gonna is the contraction of going to. It is quite common in spoken English. 
I’m going to buy some clothes at the mall.
Eu estou indo comprar umas roupas no shopping.
Eu vou comprar umas roupas no shopping. 
I’m going to go to the mall.
Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping. 
I’m gonna go to the mall.
Eu estou indo ao shopping. / Eu vou ao shopping. 
BE GOING TO
BE GOING TO
BE GOING TO
59
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Besides the differences in structure between the present continuous and be going 
to, there is also a difference concerning the ideas they convey.
Be going to with the verb to be in the present can only be used to refer to the future. 
That is a difference in comparison to the present continuous, because this verb 
form is also used to talk about actions in progress in the present. Moreover, be going 
to means that this future situation is an arrangement, something planned, not a 
sudden decision. Check it out: 
BE GOING TO
Affirmative Form
Subject + Be + Going To + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Be + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Negative Form
Subject + Be + Not + Going To + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Be + Not + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Interrogative Form
Be + Subject + Going To + Main Verb + Complement
Be + Sujeito + Going to + Verbo Principal + Complemento
I’m going to travel to the U.S. to do some shopping. 
Eu estou indo para os Estados Unidos fazer umas compras. 
BE GOING TO
Plan
Summing up, the structure of be going to is:
60
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Here, the salesperson sees you in a skirt and predicts that you are going to love their new skirt 
collection. It is a prediction based on evidence.
They can also ask what you are planning to buy. Suppose you have tried on many skirts. The 
salesperson can say:
So, based on what we can see, the cloudy sky, we can predict it is going to rain really soon. 
The cloudy sky is the evidence. And once again, we can see the contraction gonna in the 
example. 
Note that we used wanna, which is a very common contraction in English. Its full form is want 
+ to. It expresses a desire to do something.
Here is another situation in which you may hear be going to being used to make a prediction:
All the skirts you tried on were perfect. Are you gonna take them all? 
Todas as saias que você experimentou f icaram perfeitas. Você vai levar todas?BE GOING TO 
Plan
Do you still wanna go shopping today? I think it’s gonna rain cats and dogs. Look at the sky. 
Você ainda quer ir ao shopping hoje? Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu. 
I see you’re wearing a skirt. You’re gonna love our new skirt collection! 
Vejo que você está usando saia. Você vai amar nossa nova coleção de saias! 
BE GOING TO
Prediction based on evidence
BE GOING TO
Prediction based on evidence
Be going to can also convey the idea of a prediction based on evidence. We use it to talk about something 
we believe will happen because we see evidence of it. Imagine you’ve arranged to meet a friend to go 
shopping together, but the weather is getting cloudy. So, you can ask your friend: 
61
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
What kind of dress are you looking for: short, long…? 
Que tipo de vestido você está procurando: curto, longo...? 
What kind of fabric do you prefer? 
Que tipo de tecido você prefere? 
In this case, be going to conveys the idea of a plan, something the person has 
been thinking about doing. 
As you can see, be going to can be easily heard in the context of shopping. And 
the expression what kind of is quite common in this context as well. We use it to 
ask the type of something.
For example, suppose you go to a store to buy a dress. There are a million dresses 
there, so it is natural to hear this question from the salesperson. Take a look:
In this sentence, the salesperson wants to know the type of dress you 
are looking for.
When we ask a question using what kind of, we place the object we 
are referring to right after it. In this case, dress: What kind of dress. 
Then we add the interrogative form of the verb: are you looking for. 
Another question people can ask you at a store is:
Once again, we can see what kind of followed by the object we are referring to: fabric. And the 
answer to this question would be a type of fabric: cotton, silk, denim, and so on. 
If you are at a boutique, it is quite probable that the salesperson will try and give suggestions 
on what you should take. The most common way to do it is by using the modal verb should. 
Depending on the context, should may convey an idea of suggestion or recommendation. And 
its structure follows the basic rules of the modal verbs, which are the following:
WHAT KIND OF
WHAT KIND OF
Subject + Should + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Should + Verbo Principal + Complemento
SHOULD
Affirmative Form
62
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Subject + Should + Not (Shouldn’t) + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Should + Not (Shouldn’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento
For example: 
For example: 
In the affirmative form, we have the subject You, then should, and the main verb 
try. That is a suggestion to try on the skirt. 
Now, look at the structure in the negative form:
SHOULD
Negative Form
You should try this flowered silk skirt.
Você deveria experimentar essa saia f lorida de seda.
You shouldn’t try this flowered silk skirt.
Você não deveria experimentar essa saia f lorida de seda.
SHOULD
Suggestion/Recommendation
SHOULD
Negative Form
The difference is that we place not right after should. As for the context, now 
someone is suggesting to someone else that they should not do something. 
Finally, the structure for the interrogative form:
Should + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Should + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento
SHOULD
Interrogative Form
63
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
For example: 
The situation is slightly different now, since it is a request for a suggestion. 
It is common to ask for a recommendation for ourselves. But it is not so common 
to ask for a recommendation for somebody else. So, the interrogative structure 
is used especially with the f irst person singular I, or f irst person plural we. 
And we could also use it to request a suggestion in general, for example:
Should I try this flowered silk skirt?
Eu deveria experimentar essa saia f lorida de seda? 
What should we do? 
O que nós deveríamos fazer? 
SHOULD
Request for a suggestion 
SHOULD
Request for a suggestion 
In this example, by using the question word what + interrogative form of should, 
we indicate that we don’t know what to do at all, so we ask for a suggestion.
In this chapter, we talked about the present continuous, the 
structure be going to, the question word what, the modal verb 
should, and the contraction of verbs. If you want to learn more 
about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide section at 
the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Be Going To – Future Page 193 w
Contraction of Verbs Page 200 w
Modal Verb Should Page 226 w
Present Continuous Page 251 w
Question Word What Page 260 w
< voltar para o índice
6464
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 3 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Choose the option that best explains the idea conveyed by the sentences.
a) I’m traveling to the United States next month 
 to do some shopping. 
 Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês 
 que vem para fazer umas compras.
 ( 1 ) arrangement
 ( 2 ) action in progress
b) I’m going to buy some clothes at the mall.
 Eu estou indo comprar umas roupas no 
 shopping. 
 ( 1 ) planned action
 ( 2 ) prediction
c) I think it’s gonna rain cats and dogs. Look at 
 the sky. 
 Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu. 
 ( 1 ) arrangement
 ( 2 ) prediction
d) Should I try this flowered silk skirt?
 Eu deveria experimentar essa saia florida de 
 seda? 
 ( 1 ) giving suggestion
 ( 2 ) asking for suggestion
e) I see you’re wearing a skirt. You’re gonna love 
 our new skirt collection! 
 Vejo que você está usando saia. Você vai 
 amar nossa nova coleção de saias! 
 ( 1 ) predicition 
 ( 2 ) arrangement
a) to the United States next month to do some shopping. 
 Eu estou viajando para os Estados Unidos mês que vem para fazer umas compras. 
b) to the mall. 
 Eu estou indo ao shopping. 
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words according to the translation.
65
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 3 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
A
ct
iv
ity
 A
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 1
b.
 1
c.
 2
d.
 2
e.
 1
A
ct
iv
ity
 B
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 I 
am
 (I
’m
) t
ra
ve
lin
g 
/ I
 a
m
 (I
’m
) g
oi
ng
 to
 tr
av
el
 
b.
 I 
am
 (I
’m
) g
oi
ng
 / 
I a
m
 (I
’m
) g
oi
ng
 to
 g
o 
c.
 I 
am
 (I
’m
) g
oi
ng
 to
 b
uy
 / 
I a
m
 (I
’m
) b
uy
in
g 
d.
 it
 is
 (i
t’s
) g
oi
ng
 to
 ra
in
 
e.
 W
ha
t k
in
d 
of
f. 
Yo
u 
sh
ou
ld
 tr
y
c) some clothes at the mall.
 Eu vou comprar umas roupas no shopping. 
d) I think cats and dogs. Look at the sky.
 Acho que vai chover canivete. Olha o céu. 
e) fabric do you prefer? 
 Que tipo de tecido você prefere? 
f) this flowered silk skirt.
 Você deveria experimentar essa saia florida de seda.
66
< voltar para o índice
Sizes and 
Measures.
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[At a store]
Lucas:
So, the measurement system in the U.S. is different than what it is in 
other countries, because other countries use the metric system, but here 
in the U.S., we don’t.
Amy:
For example, we measure height in feet. So, each foot measures to 
about 30 centimeters. For example, if you were 1.9 meter tall, we would 
say you were 6 foot 2.
Lucas:
And the same thing goes for weight. In the U.S. we measure weight in 
pounds. So, if you are about 176 pounds, like me, that would mean that 
you’re about 80 kilograms.
Amy:
American measurements are important to keep in mind if you’re 
shopping for clothes, especially if they’re a gift for someone else!
Lucas:
And the measurementthat we use for clothes is also pretty unique. 
So, for example, you might notice that, on a tag, there are two different 
numbers on the label. This one says 31-32.
Amy:
The f irst number is referring to waist size, and the second number is 
referring to the inseam.
SIZES AND MEASURES
In this chapter, you are going to learn about sizes and measures used in the U.S., 
which are quite different from the ones used in other countries. You will also learn 
some language items to help you interact with the salesperson concerning this 
matter. 
Now look at the script of Sizes and Measures.
68
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Interviewing a salesperson]
Amy:
Hey, guys! I’m here with Georgy, who works at one of the most famous 
stores in America! He’s a sales associate, and we’re going to talk to him 
about sizing today! So, when you have international visitors, what do 
you do for them to make sure they’re getting the right size?
Georgy:
Well, the f irst thing that we do is: we try to get their size, so we show 
them a chart of small, medium, large, or extra-large. And that chart has 
the matrix of everything, from sizing from different countries as well. So, 
we try to get their size so whenever they’re looking at a shirt that they 
like, or button-up shirt or something, we try to give them two sizes, just 
to see which one is f itting and which one works best for them.
Amy:
Two sizes to try on, you mean?
Georgy:
Correct.
Amy: 
So, I know that denim sizing, too, we usually have it go by waist size 
and inseam, so they are two measurements. Can you tell me more about 
that? What’s the order?
Georgy:
For guys here in the U.S., we try to go for the waist and then the inseam 
as well. The inseam starting close to the groin, all the way down to the 
ankle. So, I am a 32 by 30. And it’s awesome, because I don’t have to 
cut my jeans or anything like that! In other countries, you always go by 
the waist, and 42 is the inseam. So, the inseam is always going to be 42 
for other countries, because the individual buys the jeans and after they 
buy the jeans, they’ll cut it themselves and tailor it.
Amy:
So, if I came to you and I knew my measurements... I know mine in 
inches, not centimeters, like the rest of the world. I could ask you to look 
at the chart to see what size I’d be for skirts, versus sweatpants, versus 
slacks, versus denim, right?
69
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Georgy:
Correct! A good sales associate already knows everything as soon as 
he sees you, and he’s already evaluating, “that person is a medium", or 
“that person’s skirt is a number 2”. So, you would definitely come to us, 
and we could also show you the chart that we have, and the chart would 
actually assist you in picking out what dress, or what shirt you need.
Amy:
Cool! And thank you so much! This has been very informative!
Georgy:
Thank you so much!
[Em uma loja]
Lucas:
O sistema de medidas nos EUA é diferente do que encontramos em 
outros países, porque neles se usa o sistema métrico, e nos EUA, não.
Amy:
Por exemplo, medimos a altura em pés. Cada pé mede cerca de 30 
centímetros. Ou seja, se você mede 1,90 metro, nós dizemos que você 
tem 6’2’’ pés.
Lucas:
O mesmo vale para o peso. Nos EUA, usamos libras. Logo, se você pesa 
176 libras como eu, isso signif ica que você pesa cerca de 80 quilos.
Amy:
É importante se lembrar das unidades americanas quando você compra 
roupas, especialmente ao comprar um presente para alguém!
Lucas:
E as medidas que usamos para roupas também são peculiares! Por 
exemplo, você pode notar em uma etiqueta que temos dois tamanhos 
diferentes. Esta aqui diz que o tamanho é 31-32.
TAMANHOS E MEDIDAS
70
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
O primeiro número está se referindo ao tamanho da cintura, e o 
segundo, ao tamanho da perna.
[Entrevistando um vendedor]
Amy:
Oi pessoal! Estou aqui com o Georgy, que trabalha em uma das lojas 
mais famosas dos EUA! Ele é assistente de vendas, e vamos conversar 
sobre tamanhos de roupa! Quando você encontra turistas internacionais, 
o que você faz para garantir que eles estejam comprando o tamanho 
correto?
Georgy:
Bem, a primeira coisa a se fazer é saber que tamanho eles usam. Nós 
mostramos uma tabela com os tamanhos P, M, G e GG. Essa tabela 
tem praticamente a matriz de tudo, incluindo as medidas usadas em 
outros países. Logo, tentamos descobrir o tamanho usado, se eles estão 
olhando para uma camiseta que gostaram, uma camisa, ou algo do tipo, 
só lhes damos dois tamanhos para ver qual deles veste melhor.
Amy:
Dois tamanhos para eles provarem?
Georgy:
Correto.
Amy:
Eu sei que, para calças jeans, nós normalmente usamos o tamanho da 
cintura e o da perna; logo, são duas medidas. Você pode me falar mais 
sobre isso? Qual é a ordem a seguir?
Georgy:
Para pessoas aqui dos Estados Unidos, sempre começamos pela cintura 
e depois pelo comprimento da perna. Essa medida começa perto da 
virilha e vai até o calcanhar. Por exemplo, eu uso tamanho 32 por 30. E é 
muito bom, porque não tenho que fazer a bainha das minhas calças! Em 
outros países, você sempre usa a medida da cintura, e o comprimento 
da perna é 42. Logo, o comprimento da perna sempre será esse, porque 
o cliente compra a calça para depois fazer a bainha. 
Amy:
Então, se eu viesse falar com você e soubesse minhas medidas, e eu 
sei as minhas em polegadas, e não em centímetros como no resto 
do mundo, eu poderia pedir para olhar a sua tabela para saber meu 
tamanho de saia, de calça de moletom, calça casual e jeans, correto?
71
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Georgy:
Correto! Toda pessoa que trabalha bem com vendas já sabe disso, e 
assim que ela te vê, já sabe que seu tamanho é M, ou que tal pessoa usa 
saia tamanho 2. Então, você viria falar com a gente, nós mostraríamos 
nossa tabela, e ela te ajudaria a escolher qual vestido ou camisa de que 
você precisa.
Amy:
Legal! Muito obrigada! Foi muito informativo!
Georgy:
Muito obrigado!
72
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 4 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
The whole measurement system is different in the U.S., for they use the United 
States customary units. Most countries use the metric system. Compare: 
The salespeople are generally trained to know the customers’ sizes only by looking 
at them. If you need any help f inding the right size, you can say, for example: 
Since we are talking about pants, we used size of pants. But if you want another piece of 
clothing, just change pants for the item you want, such as dress or shirt. Let’s see:
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
Weight
Peso
1 pound ˜ 0,5 kilos
1 ounce ˜ 28 grams
Length
Comprimento
1 foot ˜ 30 cm
1 inch ˜ 2.5 cm 
Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of pants? 
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de calças? 
Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of dress? 
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?
Excuse me. Could you help me find the right size of shirt? 
Com licença. Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de camisa?
73
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
If it is for yourself, you can say: If it is for someone else, you say:
And there is also extra small, or XS, and extra-extra large, XXL.
And then you may describe the person or say the size they wear back home. 
Some brands use sizes that can be recognized internationally. Here they are:
I’m buying it for myself. 
Estou comprando para mim mesmo(a). 
I’m buying it for someone else.
Estou comprando para outra pessoa. 
SIZES
Small (S)
Pequeno (P)
Medium (M) 
Médio (M)
Large (L) 
Grande (G)
Extra Large (XL)
Extragrande (GG) 
And here is howyou can say your size:
I’m a small. 
Eu uso tamanho pequeno. 
As a response, the salesperson may ask you for whom that item is: 
Are you buying it for yourself or someone else?
Você está comprando para você mesmo(a) ou para outra pessoa? 
74
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Notice that we use the verb to be, not the verb use, since it can’t be used to talk 
about clothes. It is incorrect to say, “I use a small,” for example. For that, we can 
use the verb wear. Check it out: 
And if the size you got is too small, ask the 
salesperson for help. Just say:
In case it is the opposite, you say:
This dress is too tight for me. 
Esse vestido está muito apertado para mim. 
These pants are too loose for me. 
Essas calças estão muito largas para mim. 
Do you have it in another size? 
Você tem essa peça em outro tamanho? 
And to ask for a different size, you can say:
I use a small.
Eu uso tamanho pequeno.
I wear a small. 
Eu visto tamanho pequeno. 
To ask for an item in another color, you can say:
Can I have this in blue/black? 
Posso ver isso em azul/preto?
Can I have these in blue/black? 
Posso ver esses em azul/preto? 
Now you know a bit about units of measurement in the United States 
customary units and how to interact with the salespeople concerning 
sizes and measurements of clothes in the U.S. 
75
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.
( 1 ) 1 pound
( 2 ) 1 ounce
( 3 ) 1 foot
( 4 ) 1 inch
( 5 ) Size
( 6 ) Large
( 7 ) Small
( 8 ) Medium
( 9 ) Tight
( 10 ) Loose
( 11 ) Pants
( 12 ) Dress
( ) Apertado
( ) Tamanho
( ) Largo
( ) Calças 
( ) 1 pé
( ) Médio
( ) Vestido
( ) Pequeno
( ) 1 libra
( ) Grande
( ) 1 onça
( ) 1 polegada
a) I wear a . 
 Eu visto tamanho pequeno. 
b) This dress is too for me. 
 Esse vestido está muito apertado para mim. 
c) These pants are too for me. 
 Essas calças estão muito largas para mim. 
d) Do you have it in another ?
 Você tem essa peça em outro tamanho? 
e) Are you buying it for or 
 someone else? 
 Você está comprando para você mesmo(a) 
 ou para outra pessoa? 
f) Can I have this in ?
 Posso ver isso em azul? 
Activity A – Answers
9/ 5 / 10 / 11 / 3 / 8 / 
12 / 7 / 1 / 6 / 2 / 4
Activity B – Answers
a. small
b. tight
c. loose
d. size
e. yourself
f. blue
76
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we will talk about reflexive, subject, and object pronouns, as well 
as the question word who.
Let’s start with subject pronouns. Look at the example: 
Based on the context of shopping, we understand it is a customer asking a 
salesperson for help. That’s why the subject pronoun is you, which is used to talk 
directly to the person. Moreover, you represents the person that will perform the 
action of helping the customer. 
Let’s see another example:
Again, it is a customer talking to a salesperson. We refer to the salesperson by using 
you, since we are talking directly to him or her. When we analyze the verb, we notice 
that you is the one that performs the action expressed by the main verb have. 
The subject pronouns are:
Could you help me find the right size of dress?
Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?
Do you have it in another size?
Você tem isso em outro tamanho? 
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
Singular
 
I = eu
you = você 
he = ele 
she = ela
it = ele/ela; isso (pronome neutro) 
Plural 
we = nós
you = vocês 
they = eles/elas
77
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Notice that we use you for the second person in both singular and plural forms. 
It is important to highlight that the subject pronoun it cannot be used for people. 
Let’s see one more example of the use of subject pronouns. If you want to talk 
about the salesperson, you can say:
Notice that here we are not talking directly to the salesperson anymore, but 
about him or her. So, we can replace the word salesperson for the third person 
subject pronoun he or she.
Now, take a look at this other sentence: 
In this case, right after the verb help, there is the pronoun me. It refers to the 
person who is asking the question. Me is the receiver of the action, that is, 
receives help from someone. So, we can say that this is the object of the verb. 
We have got a similar case in this other sentence. Check it out:
By the context, we know this question refers to the dress, even though we didn’t 
use the word dress in the sentence. Instead, we used the pronoun it, which is the 
object of the verb. That means that someone has the dress, and not the other 
way around. 
In the previous examples, me refers to I, and it replaces dress. That means that 
me and it work as object pronouns: they represent the objects of the verbs. In 
that sense, they are opposite to subject pronouns, which represent the agents 
of actions.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
Do you have it in another size?
Você tem isso em outro tamanho? 
The salesperson has many dresses to show. 
O(A) vendedor(a) tem muitos vestidos para mostrar. 
He/She has many dresses to show.
Ele/Ela tem muitos vestidos para mostrar.
Could you help me find the right size of dress?
Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?
78
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Check out a list of the object pronouns and the subject pronouns they refer to: 
In short, subject pronouns do the action, and the object pronouns receive the 
action. For the first person singular, use me. For the second person singular, 
you. It is the same word we use to represent the subject pronoun, but we can see 
their difference in the context. 
For the third person singular, we have him for masculine, her for feminine, and it 
for all the other cases, except for people. Notice that we also use the word it as a 
subject pronoun, but the context will show the difference. 
In the plural, for the first person, we have us. For the second person, you. 
Again, always pay attention to the context to f ind out if it is singular or plural, 
subject or object pronoun. And for the third person plural, we have them. 
Here, the customer is performing the action of looking for something. So, the 
customer is the subject of the verb. To replace it, we will use a subject pronoun. 
Since customer can be either male or female, we can use he or she.
Let’s see some examples of the use of object pronouns:
The customer is looking for a shirt. 
O(A) cliente está procurando por uma camisa. 
He/She is looking for it. 
Ele/Ela está procurando por ela/ele/isso. 
OBJECT PRONOUNS
Subject Pronoun
(executa a ação)
I 
you 
he 
she 
it
we
you
they
Object Pronoun
( recebe a ação)
me
you 
him 
her 
it
us
you
them
79
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The salesperson can be replaced with he or she, since it is the subject of the sentence—He or 
she is helping my parents, or them, which is the object of the sentence. 
To recognize the subject, we ask who does the action of the main verb. Since it is a question 
to f ind out the subject, we call it who (subject). Check it out: 
To ask a question using who (subject), we take the affirmative form, remove the 
subject, and use who in its place.
Notice that the question with who (subject) is always in the third person 
singular, “Who is helping?”. It makes no sense to ask it in the plural, “Who are 
helping?”, it is not correct. Regardless of the answer, this question will always be 
in the singular. 
The previous example wasin the present continuous, so we just keep the verb to 
be as an auxiliary verb. 
Who is helping the customer? 
Quem está ajudando o cliente? 
WHO (SUBJECT)
And what is he or she looking for? A shirt. So, the shirt suffers the action of 
being looked for. Then we use an object pronoun to replace it. Shirt is a singular 
noun, so, we use it. 
Sometimes, the object of the verb will be a person. Have a look:
The salesperson is helping my parents. 
O(A) vendedor(a) está ajudando os meus pais.
OBJECT PRONOUNS
Who are helping the customer? 
Quem estão ajudando o cliente? 
He/She is helping them. 
Ele/Ela está ajudando eles.
80
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Notice that we did not use the auxiliary verb do, which is normally 
used in questions in the simple present. Following the same logic as 
before, we take the sentence in the aff irmative form and just place 
who where the subject would be. 
As you already know, questions using who (subject) are always 
asked in the singular. That’s why we use the suff ix -S in the main 
verb, knows, so that we conjugate it in the third person singular.
A possible answer for that question would be:
The answer in this case is salespeople, which is in the third person plural. As 
you can see, only the questions must always be in the third person singular.
We can also use who to f ind out the person who receives the action. It is called 
who (object). Take a look:
Who usually knows the right size for you? 
Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?
Who usually knows the right size for you? 
Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?
Salespeople usually know the right size for you.
Vendedores normalmente sabem o tamanho certo pra você.
WHO (SUBJECT)
WHO (SUBJECT)
Now, let’s ask a question with who (subject) in the simple present: 
Who is the salesperson helping? 
Quem o vendedor está ajudando? 
WHO (OBJECT) + INTERROGATIVE FORM
81
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Who is the salesperson helping? 
Quem o vendedor está ajudando? 
The salesperson is helping the customer.
O vendedor está ajudando o cliente.
Foreign customers usually buy presents for their relatives. 
Clientes estrangeiros normalmente compram presentes para seus parentes. 
Notice that now we follow the general structure of the interrogative form. The 
sentence is in the present continuous, so we start with who and then add the 
interrogative form: is the salesperson helping. That is, we need to place the 
auxiliary verb to be before the subject. 
By now, it should be clear that questions with who refer to a person, no matter 
if it is the subject or the object. With that in mind, a possible answer to that 
question can be as follows:
Here, the customer is the person who is being helped by the salesperson, that is, he/she is the one who is 
receiving the action. So, it is the object of the sentence. 
In this case, the verb help is related to only one object, but some verbs admit two objects. That is the case 
of the verb to buy, for example, as we buy something to someone. There are two objects for this verb: one 
refers to a thing, and the other refers to a person. 
Have a look at the next example:
The direct object is the one that refers to a thing, in this case, presents; and the 
indirect object is introduced by a preposition: for their relatives. Since the indirect 
object refers to a person, we will ask the question using who. Check it out:
WHO (OBJECT)
WHO (OBJECT)
Who do foreign customers usually buy presents for? 
Para quem clientes estrangeiros normalmente compram presentes? 
WHO (OBJECT)
82
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Notice that we are using the simple present, so we use the structure of the interrogative form 
in the simple present. We have the question word who, then the auxiliary verb do, the subject, 
foreign customers, and the complement. Also notice that the preposition to must be placed at 
the end of the question.
In other words, some questions using who (object) need extra attention, for the verb may 
admit more than one object and generate a question with a preposition. 
So far, we’ve seen sentences in which the subject is different from the object, and we use 
object pronouns to refer to the one who receives the action. But sometimes the subject and 
the object are the same person. Take a look at this sentence:
In this sentence, the subject is I. And there are two objects: one is shirt, and the 
other is me. That is, I am buying the shirt, and it is a gift for me. So, the subject 
and the object refer to the same person. In this case, we use reflexive pronouns 
to refer to the object of the verb. And the reflexive pronoun for the subject 
pronoun I is myself. 
I’m buying the shirt for myself. 
Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim mesmo. 
SUBJECT = OBJECT 
Let’s see the list of reflexive pronouns related to the subject pronouns. 
Take a look:
Subject Pronouns
(executa a ação)
I 
you 
he 
she 
it
we
you
they
Reflexive Pronouns
( recebe a ação)
myself
yourself 
himself
herself
itself
ourselves
yourselves
themselves
83
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Unfortunately, there is no general rule to form the reflexive pronouns, so the best 
is to practice so you can get used to them. But we can say that the termination 
-self is used for the pronouns in the singular, and -selves is used for the ones in 
the plural.
Let’s see more examples.
In this sentence, the subject is you, so we use the reflexive pronoun yourself.
Another one:
Are you buying it for yourself or someone else?
Você está comprando para você mesmo ou para outra pessoa 
My mother likes to buy shoes for herself. 
Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela mesma. 
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
The subject now is my mother, which can be related to the subject pronoun she, 
so, in this case, the corresponding reflexive pronoun is herself.
And in both these cases, the question with who will follow the same logic as the 
object pronoun. For the f irst example, we would have:
Who are you buying it for?
Para quem você está comprando isso?
For myself.
Para mim mesmo(a).
WHO (OBJECT) AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 
84
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we talked about subject, object, and reflexive 
pronouns and the question word who. If you want to learn 
more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide 
section at the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Object Pronouns Page 232 w 
Question Word Who Page 278 w
Reflexive Pronouns Page 288 w
Subject Pronouns Page 323 w
And in the other example: 
As you can see, regardless of the answer, the question will be asked 
the same way.
Who does my mother like to buy shoes for? 
Para quem minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos? 
For herself. 
Para ela mesma.
WHO (OBJECT) AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 
85
< voltar para o índice
85
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 4 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Choose the option that describes the kind of pronoun used in the sentences.
a) Could you help me find the right size of 
 dress?
 Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho 
 certo de vestido?
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
b) Do you have it in another size?
 Você tem isso em outro tamanho? 
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
c) My mother likes to buy shoes for herself. 
 Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela 
 mesma. 
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
d) She is lookingfor it. 
 Ela está procurando por isso. 
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
e) He is helping them. 
 Ele está ajudando eles.
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
f) I’m buying the shirt for myself. 
 Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim 
 mesmo. 
 ( 1 ) Subject Pronoun
 ( 2 ) Object Pronoun
 ( 3 ) Reflexive Pronoun
a) has many dresses to show. 
 Ela tem muitos vestidos para mostrar. 
b) Could you help find the right size of dress?
 Você poderia me ajudar a achar o tamanho certo de vestido?
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.
86
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 4 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
a.
 2
b.
 2
c.
 3
d.
 1
e.
 2
f. 
3
a.
 S
he
b.
 m
e
c.
 h
er
se
lf
d.
 th
em
e.
 y
ou
f. 
m
ys
el
f
A
ct
iv
ity
 A
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
A
ct
iv
ity
 B
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
c) My mother likes to buy shoes for .
 Minha mãe gosta de comprar sapatos para ela mesma. 
d) She is helping .
 Ela está ajudando eles.
e) Who usually knows the right size for ?
 Quem geralmente sabe o tamanho certo para você?
f) I’m buying the shirt for . 
 Eu estou comprando a camisa para mim mesmo.
87
< voltar para o índice
Shopping 
for Shoes.
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[At a store]
Lucas:
So, by now you’re probably guessing that the American system for 
measuring shoes is also quite unique, and you would be absolutely 
right! The big thing to know about this is that sizes for men’s shoes and 
women’s shoes are actually different.
Amy:
A better way to put it is that they use the same system. So, we have 
sizes ranging from 5 to 12, or even up to 14 for men. And they also 
come in half-sizes, so f ive and a half, six, six and a half, so on and so 
forth. But the sizes are measured differently between men and women.
Lucas:
Which is kind of weird...
Amy:
It is weird! 
Lucas:
Yeah, let’s show them!
Amy:
OK!
[Showing two pairs of shoes]
Lucas:
OK, you guys! So, what we were saying earlier: these are two different 
pairs of shoes, but they are technically the same size, they’re both the 
size 8. This is a man’s size 8.
SHOPPING FOR SHOES
In this chapter, we will focus on specif ic vocabulary related to buying shoes. 
We will also see some grammar topics that will help you interact in this kind of 
situation. 
Now, look at the script of Shopping for Shoes.
89
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
This is a woman’s 8W.
Lucas:
Right, so they’ll always be marked. Sometimes men’s shoes will be 
marked with an M, sometimes the women’s shoes will be marked with 
a W, so you will be able to look at the markings to see which one is for 
women and which one is for men.
Amy:
But we’re going to show you how different these sizes are!
[Comparing the shoes]
Lucas:
I mean, let’s see if you guys can see, they’re touching...You can see 
across the top that the women’s shoe is noticeably smaller than the 
men’s shoe. So, you have to definitely take note of that, because this is a 
uniquely American experience!
Amy:
Yeah, you do not want to go home with the wrong size shoes.
Lucas:
Especially if you’re shopping for someone else! Make sure that you know 
that you’re looking at a men’s shoe size, or a women’s shoe size. And if 
all else fails, you can take out your measuring tape and measure it!
[Interviewing a sales associate]
Lucas:
OK, everyone! So, we have Lynn here, who’s going to answer some 
questions about shoes! So, f irst of all, what kind of shoes do you carry 
here?
Lynn:
We carry hiking shoes, athletic tennis shoes, we carry work shoes.
Lucas:
Lots of different kinds?
Lynn:
Lots of different kinds of shoes, summer shoes, sandals, slippers, boat 
shoes, all kinds...
Lucas:
Great! So, for all different activities! All different types of weather and 
seasons.
90
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Do you have a lot of international clients or visitors come through?
Lynn:
In the summertime we get quite a few visitors, and also around the 
holidays; we do also have people from different countries that are 
coming here to spend the holidays.
Amy:
Do they ask for help with the difference in shoe sizing between the 
systems?
Lynn:
Sometimes they do. And European sizes are different than our sizes 
here, so sometimes we'll have to ask them what size of shoe, sometimes 
we’ll have to look inside their shoe and try to compare to get it as close 
as possible to what we have here!
Lucas:
So, you do have ways of helping them make that translation.
Lynn:
Absolutely! We always try to help the customer!
Lucas:
Do you have any advice for international customers that you might want 
to throw out there?
Lynn:
Just look around; if you have questions, ask. We’ll help you with sizes 
and compare prices with different things we carry in the store. 
Lucas:
Well, thank you, Lynn! That was really helpful! Thanks a lot!
Lynn:
I’m glad I was able to help!
Lucas:
Thank you!
91
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
COMPRANDO CALÇADOS
[Em uma loja]
Lucas:
OK, você provavelmente já adivinhou que o sistema americano para o 
tamanho de sapatos também é peculiar, e você está totalmente certo! 
É importante saber que os tamanhos masculinos e femininos são 
diferentes.
Amy:
Uma maneira melhor de dizer isso é que eles usam o mesmo sistema. 
Os tamanhos variam de 5 a 12, ou até mesmo 14 para homens. E 
também há tamanhos como cinco, cinco e meio, seis e seis e meio, 
e assim por diante. Porém, esses tamanhos são medidos de forma 
diferente entre homens e mulheres.
Lucas:
O que é um pouco estranho...
Amy:
É estranho, sim!
Lucas:
Sim! Vamos mostrar para eles!
Amy:
OK!
[Mostrando dois pares de calçados]
Lucas:
OK, pessoal! Como estávamos falando antes, temos dois pares 
diferentes de tênis, que, tecnicamente, têm o mesmo tamanho: ambos 
são tamanho 8. Este é um tamanho 8 masculino.
Amy:
Este é um tamanho 8 feminino.
Lucas:
Certo, então eles são marcados. Às vezes, tênis masculinos são 
marcados com um M, e, às vezes, tênis femininos são marcados com um 
W. Então, você poderá ver e procurar por esses detalhes para saber qual 
é o feminino e qual é o masculino.
Amy:
Mas vamos mostrar as diferenças desses tamanhos!
92
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Comparando os calçados]
Lucas:
Como vocês podem ver, eles estão se tocando... Você pode ver na ponta 
que o feminino é claramente menor do que o tênis masculino. Logo, você 
definitivamente tem que se lembrar disso, pois isso é uma experiência 
singularmente americana!
Amy:
Exato! Você não quer voltar para casa com o tamanho de tênis errado.
Lucas:
Especialmente caso esteja comprando para outra pessoa! Certif ique-se 
de saber diferenciar um tênis masculino de um tênis feminino. E, se tudo 
o mais der errado, você sempre pode usar a f ita métrica para medi-lo!
[Entrevistando uma vendedora]
Lucas:
OK, galera! Estamos aqui com a Lynn, que vai nos responder algumas 
perguntas sobre calçados! Primeiramente, que tipos de calçados vocês 
vendem aqui?
Lynn:
Nós vendemos botas para trilha, tênis para esporte, sapatos sociais...
Lucas:
Inúmeros tipos?
Lynn:
Inúmeros tipos de calçados, calçados mais casuais, sandálias, chinelos, 
galochas, vários tipos...
Lucas:
Ótimo! Para todas as atividades! Todo tipo de atividade ou clima!
Amy:
Vocês recebem muitos visitantes internacionais?
Lynn:
Durante o verão recebemos alguns turistas, e também mais perto das 
festas de f im de ano. Também recebemos pessoas de países diferentes 
que vieram passar o f im de ano aqui.
Amy:
Eles pedem ajuda com a diferença entre os tamanhos de calçados?
93
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 VocabularyVocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lynn:
Algumas vezes sim. Tamanhos europeus são diferentes dos nossos, e às 
vezes temos que perguntar qual o tamanho que os clientes usam, ou até 
mesmo olhar dentro dos seus calçados para comparar e chegar o mais 
perto possível do que temos aqui.
Lucas:
Então você tem ferramentas para ajudar nessa tradução?
Lynn:
É claro! Nós sempre tentamos ajudar nossos clientes!
Lucas:
Você tem algum conselho para clientes internacionais que você queira 
compartilhar?
Lynn:
Dê uma olhada e, caso tenha perguntas, é só chamar! Vamos te ajudar 
com tudo isso: tamanhos, comparar os preços com outros artigos que 
vendemos na loja...
Lucas:
Muito obrigado, Lynn! Isso nos ajudou muito! Muito obrigado!
Lynn:
Que bom que pude ajudar!
Lucas:
Obrigado!
94
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 5 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Some stores categorize shoes by age and gender. Look: 
You can f ind shelves or even whole aisles for these categories. They may also be subdivided 
according to their use. 
Casual shoes are more comfortable and used for everyday activities. 
For example: 
CATEGORIES
Women’s shoes
Calçados femininos
Flip-flops
Chinelos
Sandals
Sandálias
Trainers and Sneakers
Tênis
CASUAL SHOES
Men’s shoes
Calçados masculinos
Kids’ shoes
Calçados infantis
Rubber boots
Galochas
Ballerinas / Ballet flats
Sapatilhas
Moccasins
Mocassins 
95
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Dress shoes are considered formal wear, which means they are used in work 
environments, and at fancy parties or weddings. For example: 
High-heels
Sapatos de salto alto em geral
Oxfords
Sapatos sociais masculinos 
Pumps
Scarpins
Stilettos
Sapato de salto agulha 
DRESS SHOES
Just like clothes, shoe sizes are different in the U.S. The stores will 
probably have size charts that compare sizes. If you need any help, 
you can approach the salesperson and say:
Excuse me. Could you help me find the right shoe size? 
Você pode me ajudar a achar o tamanho de sapato certo? 
96
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
You can also say the size you are used to wearing and they will help you f ind the 
corresponding one there. Here is what you can say:
And the salesperson may respond:
My kid’s foot is 14 cm long. What shoe size will fit him/her? 
O pé do meu f ilho / da minha f ilha mede 14 cm. Qual tamanho de sapato 
vai servir nele(a)?
You should get a size 7. Or a 7 and half if you’re buying sneakers. 
Você deveria levar o tamanho 7. Ou 7 e meio, se for comprar tênis. 
How much is it? 
Quanto custa? 
It’s 60 dollars plus taxes. 
São 60 dólares mais impostos. 
After choosing the shoes, it is time to pay for them. 
If you have questions about the price, ask:
And the salesperson may answer:
My kid is a size 23 in Brazil. What’s the corresponding size here? 
Meu filho / Minha f ilha usa tamanho 23 no Brasil. Qual o tamanho 
correspondente aqui? 
Remember that the sales taxes in the United States are not included in the 
prices you see on the tags. So, when you check out at the cashier, they will add 
everything up and tell you the total amount. Suppose sales taxes in a city are 
10%, and the product costs 60 dollars. Then they will say:
It will be 66 dollars. 
Ficou em 66 dólares. / O total é 66 dólares. 
97
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Then they will discount the value, inform you the 
new amount, and probably ask one of the following:
To which you can answer:
How would you like to pay? 
Como você gostaria de pagar?
I’ll pay with my credit card. 
Vou pagar com meu cartão de crédito. 
Now you know how to interact in stores and at the 
cashier using vocabulary related to shoes. 
Will it be cash or credit?
Vai ser em dinheiro ou no cartão de crédito?
I’ll pay cash. 
Vou pagar em dinheiro.
You can see the separate amounts in the receipt. If 
you have a voucher, you can say:
I have a voucher/coupon.
Eu tenho um cupom de desconto. 
98
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
3/ 12 / 9 / 11 / 1 / 4 / 
10 / 6 / 5 / 8 / 2 / 7
Activity B – Answers
a. shoe size
b. sneakers
c. taxes
d. voucher/coupon
e. pay
f. credit
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Shoes
( 2 ) Shoe sizes
( 3 ) Sandals
( 4 ) Flip-f lops
( 5 ) Pumps
( 6 ) High-heels
( 7 ) Stilettos
( 8 ) Oxfords
( 9 ) Sneakers
( 10 ) Ballerinas
( 11 ) Rubber boots
( 12 ) Moccasins
( ) Sandálias
( ) Mocassins
( ) Tênis
( ) Galochas 
( ) Sapatos/Calçados
( ) Chinelos
( ) Sapatilhas
( ) Sapato de salto alto
( ) Scarpins
( ) Sapatos sociais masculinos
( ) Tamanhos de sapatos
( ) Sapato de salto agulha
a) Excuse me. Could you help me find the right 
 ?
 Você pode me ajudar a achar o tamanho de 
 sapato certo? 
 
b) You should get a size 7. Or a 7 and half if 
 you’re, buying .
 Você deveria levar o tamanho 7. Ou 7 e meio, 
 se for comprar tênis. 
 
c) It’s 60 dollars plus .
 São 60 dólares mais impostos.
 
d) I have a .
 Eu tenho um cupom de desconto.
 
e) How would you like to ?
 Como você gostaria de pagar?
f) Will it be cash or ?
 Vai ser em dinheiro ou no cartão de crédito?
99
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we will talk about the possessive case, possessive adjectives, 
possessive pronouns, and the question word whose.
When we want to classify or describe an object, we can use the possessive case: 
the apostrophe + S. For example:
In this example, we are using a proper noun, Anna, with the apostrophe + S and the 
noun shoes. It means that the shoes belong to Anna.
It is also possible to talk about possession using the apostrophe + S with a 
common noun. Let’s see an example:
Here we have the word kid, which is a common noun. We add the apostrophe + 
S and the word foot to indicate that part of the body as belonging to the kid we are 
talking about.
And we use both the possessive case and the possessive pronouns to show that 
someone owns something. Let’s take a look at an example we have already seen 
to better understand it:
POSSESSIVE CASE
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Anna’s shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones.
Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos.
My kid’s foot is 14 cm long. 
O pé do meu f ilho / da minha f ilha mede 14 cm. 
Anna’s shoes are old and ugly.
Os sapatos da Anna são velhos e feios.
Her shoes are old and ugly. 
Os seus sapatos / Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios.
100
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In the example, let’s suppose the kid we are talking about is a boy. In this case, 
the possessive adjective is his. So, we will replace kid’s with the corresponding 
possessive adjective: his.
And once again, the possessive adjective is followed by what belongs to boy—
foot. Notice that the possessive adjective his replaces kid’s, but we also removed 
my from the sentence, because it wouldn’t make sense to leave it there.
In short, the possessive adjective replaces the noun + apostrophe + S. Let’s take 
a look at the possessive adjectives and what they refer to:
The possessive adjectives will always be followed by the object to 
which we refer. For example: my shoes, your shoes, their shoes, 
and so on. 
Now, imagine the following dialogue:
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
My kid’s foot is 14 cm long.
O pé do meu f ilho mede 14 cm. 
His foot is 14 cm long. 
O pé dele mede 14 cm. 
First Person
my
meu(s),minha(s)
Second Person
your
seu(s), sua(s), teu(s), tua(s)
Third Person
his
seu(s), sua(s), dele
her
seu(s), sua(s), dela
its
seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela
First Person
our
nosso(s), nossa(s)
Second Person
your
seu(s), sua(s), vosso(s), 
vossa(s), de vocês
Third Person
their
seus, suas, deles, delas
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Singular
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Plural
To replace the structure Anna + apostrophe + S, we 
can use the corresponding possessive adjective for a 
woman in the singular, which is her.
Notice that we are using the possessive adjective and 
the noun that represents the possessed object. Now, 
let’s do the same with this other sentence, look:
101
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE VS. POSSESSIVE PRONOUN
Karen: Your boots are very pretty.
Suas botas são muito bonitas.
Lia: Thank you. But they are not my boots. 
They are my mother’s. Possessive Adjective 
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.
When Karen starts talking to Lia, she says your boots, which includes the 
possessive adjective and the noun. 
Then, Lia may choose to answer using the possessive adjective my to answer 
the question. And in such case, the noun must be part of the sentence, as in: 
They are not my boots.
However, it is also an option to use the possessive pronoun mine, as in, “But 
they are not mine.” It would not be necessary to say boots again, because we 
understand it from the context. The advantage of using the possessive pronoun is 
that we avoid repeating the noun and the speech sounds more natural. 
That is the difference between the possessive adjective and the possessive 
pronoun. When we use a possessive pronoun, we replace the structure 
possessive adjective + noun.
Let’s see some more examples. Look at this sentence built with the 
possessive case: 
POSSESSIVE CASE
Anna needs new shoes. Anna’s shoes are old and ugly.
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios. 
Lia: Thank you. But they are not mine. 
They are my mother’s. Possessive Pronoun
Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.
Or
102
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this example, Hers means Her shoes or Anna’s shoes. It replaces the person who owns the 
object and the object itself, so the repetition can be avoided. 
Now, let’s see the complete list of possessive pronouns:
Anna needs new shoes. Hers are old and ugly. 
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios. 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN
Since it is not necessary to say Anna twice, we can replace Anna’s with 
a possessive adjective. Look:
Anna needs new shoes. Her shoes are old and ugly 
Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os sapatos dela estão velhos e feios. 
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE 
Her is the corresponding possessive adjective for Anna’s. 
But we still have another word being said twice: shoes. To avoid the repetition, 
we will use a possessive pronoun: 
First Person
mine
meu(s), minha(s)
Second Person
yours
seu(s), sua(s), teu(s), tua(s)
Third Person
his
seu(s), sua(s), dele
hers
seu(s), sua(s), dela
its
seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela
First Person
ours
nosso(s), nossa(s)
Second Person
yours
seu(s), sua(s), vosso(s), 
vossa(s), de vocês
Third Person
theirs
seu(s), sua(s), deles, delas
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
Singular
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
Plural
103
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
To form the possessive pronouns, you just add -S to the end of the possessive 
adjectives, unless they already end in -S, such as its and his: they will remain the 
same. The only exception is mine, which is a completely different word. 
Let’s have a look at some more examples. 
Suppose you are at the cashier paying for your shoes and the attendant mixes 
up your packages. You can say:
We used the pronoun mine to replace my shoes.
Then the attendant realizes the confusion, gives you a different package, points 
to a man, and says:
In this sentence, there are two possessive pronouns: yours, which means your 
shoes, and his, that replaces his shoes.
To ask question about possession, we use the question word whose. Let’s take a 
look at an example: 
Excuse me, but these shoes are blue. Mine are black. 
 (my shoes)
Com licença, mas estes sapatos são azuis. Os meus são pretos.
Oh, I’m sorry. These are yours. The blue shoes are his. 
 (your shoes) (his shoes)
Oh, me desculpe. Estes são os seus! Os sapatos azuis são dele. 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
Whose shoes are these? 
De quem são esses sapatos? 
WHOSE
104
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
105
< voltar para o índice
Whose packages are you holding? 
De quem são os pacotes que você está segurando? 
Whose shoes are these? 
De quem são esses sapatos?
These are Anna’s shoes. (Possessive Case)
Esses são os sapatos da Anna.
These are her shoes. (Possessive Adjective)
Esses são os sapatos dela.
These are hers. (Possessive Pronoun)
Esses são dela.
To make the question, we use whose followed by the possessed object, in this 
case, shoes. Then we add the interrogative form of the verb: are these. 
One more example:
Again, whose is followed by the possessed object, packages, and the interrogative form of the sentence. 
And to answer this question, you can use the possessive case, possessive adjectives, or possessive 
pronouns. Check it out:
WHOSE
WHOSE
In this chapter, you’ve seen how to use the possessive case, 
the possessive adjectives, the possessive pronouns and the 
question word whose. If you want to learn more about these 
topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide section at the end 
of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Possessive Adjectives Page 240 w
Possessive Case Page 244 w
Possessive Pronouns Page 248 w
Question Word Whose Page 282 w
105
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 5 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Number the sentences according to the form of possessive used in them.
( 1 ) Possessive Case
( 2 ) Possessive Adjective
( 3 ) Possessive Pronoun
a) Her shoes are old and ugly. ( )
 Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios.
b) My kid’s foot is 14 cm long. ( )
 O pé do meu f ilho / da minha f ilha mede 14 cm. 
c) Thank you. But they are not mine. They are my mother’s. ( )
 Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe. 
d) Anna needs new shoes. Hers are old and ugly. ( )
 Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios. 
e) The blue shoes are his. ( )
 Os sapatos azuis são dele. 
f) His foot is 14 cm long. ( )
 O pé dele mede 14 cm. 
a) shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones. 
 Os sapatos da Anna estão velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos. 
b) shoes are old and ugly. She needs new ones. 
 Os sapatos dela são velhos e feios. Ela precisa de sapatos novos.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.
106
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 5 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
A
ct
iv
ity
 A
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 2
b.
 1
c.
 1
d.
 3
e.
 3
f. 
2
A
ct
iv
ity
 B
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
a.
 A
nn
a’
s
b.
 H
er
c.
 H
is
d.
 m
ot
he
r’s
e.
 H
er
s
f. 
W
ho
se
g.
 th
ei
rs
c) foot is 14 cm long. 
 O pé dele mede 14 cm. 
d) Thank you. But they are not mine. They are my .
 Obrigada. Mas elas não são minhas. São da minha mãe.
e) Anna needs new shoes. are old and ugly.
 Anna precisa de sapatos novos. Os dela estão velhos e feios. 
f) shoes are these?
 De quem são esses sapatos?
g) These are .
 Esses são deles.
107
< voltar para o índice
Shopping 
for Cosmetics.
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Vocabulary ActivitiesGrammar Grammar Activities
[At a drugstore]
Lucas:
So, in a lot of countries all over the world, going to the pharmacy or to 
the drugstore doesn’t really sound like a good time. It's where you go to 
pick up medications and stuff like that.
Amy:
But that’s not how it works in the U.S.!
Lucas:
Definitely not!
Amy:
You can f ind press-on nails, nail polish, make-up, candy, party balloons, 
birthday cards, everything! I know it might sound weird, but in the U.S., 
convenience stores are kid-friendly places. And you can f ind toys and 
groceries...
Lucas:
I mean, most of the time, people don’t actually go to a drugstore to get 
medicine, although you can. But that isn’t always the reason why people 
go.
Amy:
Maybe you want to just pick up some cosmetics! You can f ind all sorts 
of make-up, perfume, nail polish, moisturizers, almost whatever you can 
think of! 
SHOPPING FOR COSMETICS
In this chapter, we will talk about shopping for cosmetics. Nowadays, men and 
women seem to care about their self-image, and this is one of the fastest growing 
industries in the world. Buying cosmetics in the United States is a whole new 
world. We will cover a few words and sentences related to this topic, and also 
some grammar that will improve your skills in the language.
Take a look at the script of Shopping for Cosmetics.
109
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Showing a product on the shelf]
Amy:
Oh, look at that giant bottle of argan oil!
Lucas:
Wow, that’s really good! 
[Walking around the drugstore]
Lucas:
So, back to what we were talking about before: if you’re looking for a 
specif ic brand, or even a luxury brand, then chances are you want to go 
to one of those specialized stores for that.
Amy:
The advantage of going to those stores is that you’ll have sales 
reps who can help make suggestions for you or answer any specif ic 
questions you might have.
Lucas:
But if you’re thinking price, now this is something that you really need 
to look into, because you’re going to f ind really good deals all over the 
place. I’m talking about some “buy one get, one free” offers, or lots of 
variations on that. Because I know I’ve seen some “buy one, get two 
free,” or “buy one, get one 50% off.” I mean, there’s lots of possibilities 
there that you should really, really take advantage of.
Amy:
You definitely want to reserve some time to check these out, because 
they’re so worth it!
[Interviewing a make-up sales professional]
Amy:
Hi, guys! I'm here with Gabriel, who is a make-up sales professional, and 
we’re going to f ind out a lot about make-up and buying it in America! 
So, what is the best place to buy it? A drugstore? Online? A specialty 
boutique?
Gabriel:
It really depends on what you’re looking for. If you’re looking for just 
something for day to day, you can get that at a pharmacy. Or just a local 
kind of little cheaper store, that’s f ine. But if you’re looking for higher 
end, maybe better blushes and eyeshadows and that kind of make-up, 
it’s better to go to a specialty store because they’ll usually have people 
like me, who are familiar with all the products in the store. And they’ll 
be able to help you pick an item that’ll be best for you. In most cosmetic 
stores, they have a demonstration.
110
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
What do you think about men wearing make-up? Because I see a lot of 
that in West Hollywood; specially I see men with better skin than me!
Gabriel:
Well, there are different levels of men wearing make-up...
Amy:
What about a way to do it that’s subtle and unnoticeable?
Gabriel:
Well, that’s best to use foundations, and concealer is actually the most 
popular thing that men get. Because it helps with the under-eye, and 
then maybe a little light eyeliner helps as well. I mean, obviously you 
don’t paint it on, but if you dab it a little around the eye, it helps define 
the eye.
Amy:
Thank you so much for this information that you gave us today!
COMPRANDO COSMÉTICOS
[Em uma drogaria]
Lucas:
Em muitos países pelo mundo, ir a uma farmácia ou drogaria não soa 
como algo divertido. São lugares onde você vai para comprar remédios e 
coisas do tipo.
Amy:
Mas não é assim que funciona nos EUA! 
111
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lucas:
Definitivamente não!
Amy:
Você pode comprar unhas postiças, esmalte, maquiagem, balas, balões 
pra festa, cartões de aniversário, tudo! Eu sei que soa como algo 
estranho, mas, nos EUA, lojas de conveniência são lugares para ir com 
seus f ilhos. Você pode encontrar brinquedos, comida...
Lucas:
Quer dizer, na maioria das vezes, as pessoas não vão à farmácia para 
comprar remédios, apesar de isso acontecer. Mas esse nem sempre é o 
motivo da sua visita!
Amy:
Talvez você queira comprar alguns cosméticos! Você pode encontrar 
todo tipo de maquiagem, perfume, esmalte, hidratantes, tudo o que você 
pensar! 
[Mostrando um produto na prateleira]
Amy:
Nossa, um frasco grande de óleo de argan!
Lucas:
Uau, que ótimo! 
[Andando pela drogaria]
Lucas:
Voltando um pouco ao que havíamos falado anteriormente, se você está 
à procura de uma marca específ ica ou até mesmo de luxo, talvez seja 
melhor você ir até uma loja especializada!
Amy:
As vantagens dessas lojas é que haverá vendedores especializados que 
podem fazer sugestões ou responder perguntas mais específ icas que 
você possa ter.
Lucas:
Mas, caso você esteja pensando em preços, isso é algo que você talvez 
precise pesquisar, porque você vai conseguir achar ótimas promoções 
em vários lugares! Estou falando de promoções “compre um, leve dois”, 
ou variações dela! Porque sei que já vi algumas de “compre um, leve 
dois” ou “compre um, e ganhe 50% de desconto na outra unidade”. 
Existem muitas possibilidades que você deveria aproveitar!
112
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Você com certeza deve reservar parte do seu tempo para conhecer 
essas lojas, pois elas valem muito a pena!
[Entrevistando um vendedor de maquiagem]
Amy:
Oi, pessoal! Estou aqui com o Gabriel, que é um vendedor de 
maquiagem profissional, e vamos aprender muito sobre maquiagem 
e como comprá-la nos Estados Unidos! Qual é o melhor local para 
comprar maquiagem? Uma drogaria, na internet, uma loja especializada?
Gabriel:
Depende do que você está procurando. Se você quer algo para o dia 
a dia, você pode ir até a farmácia, ou uma loja local e mais barata. Mas 
caso queira algo mais caro, talvez blushes melhores, e sombras e outros 
tipos de maquiagem, é melhor visitar uma loja especializada, pois lá vai 
haver pessoas, como eu, que conhecem bem os produtos da loja e vão 
conseguir lhe ajudar a escolher o melhor produto para você. Na maioria 
das lojas de cosméticos, eles fazem demonstrações.
Amy:
Qual sua opinião sobre homens usando maquiagem? Porque eu vejo 
muitos usando aqui por West Hollywood, e vejo muitos homens com 
pele melhor que a minha!
Gabriel:
Bem, há diferentes níveis de homens usando maquiagem...
Amy:
Qual seria um jeito de usá-la de modo sutil e imperceptível?
Gabriel:
Bem, é melhor usar uma boa base, e corretivo é algo muito popular entre 
homens que usam maquiagem. Porque ajuda muito com as olheiras, e 
talvez um delineador bem de leve, que também ajuda. Claro, não é para 
pintar o olho todo, mas talvez passar um pouco em volta dele; isso ajuda 
a defini-lo melhor!
Amy:
Muito obrigada pelas dicas que você nos deu hoje!
113
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 6 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Many people think like that: 
In the United States, however, you do not f ind only medication at pharmacies or drugstores:
At American drugstores, you can f ind haircare products. Look:
HAIRCARE PRODUCTS
Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication. 
Farmácias são lugares aondevocê vai para pegar medicamentos. 
Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options. 
Farmácias, que também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. 
shampoo 
xampu
conditioner
condicionador
anti-dandruff shampoo
xampu anticaspa
hair mask
máscara de hidratação capilar 
anti-hair loss shampoo
xampu antiqueda
hair dye
tintura para cabelo 
114
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
anti-aging creams
creme anti-idade
At drugstores, there are lots of possibilities that you should take 
advantage of. 
Nas drogarias, há várias possibilidades que você deve aproveitar. 
You might wanna try them on before buying. 
É uma boa ideia você experimentar os produtos antes de comprar.
perfume
If you are looking for skincare products, you can f ind:
And other cosmetics for everyday care that are cheaper than fancy brands, such as: 
At drugstores, you can also f ind free samples that you can take home and try 
before buying. In short:
If you are looking for designer-brand perfumes and make-up, you 
should go to specialty stores. And here is a piece of advice for you: 
moisturizers 
hidratantes
make-up
maquiagem
make-up remover
removedor de maquiagem
To do that, look for testers, which are products that are available to 
the public. And if you are not sure something can be tested, just ask. 
Suppose you want to test a foundation; you can say:
Can I test this foundation? 
Eu posso experimentar essa base? 
115
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Pay attention to the verb test. It is the most appropriate in this context, but if you 
are at a shoes or clothing store, for instance, you can’t say: 
For clothes and shoes, you can only use try on. So, the right sentence is:
Can I try these shoes on? 
Eu posso experimentar esses sapatos? 
Can I test these shoes? 
Posso testar esses sapatos? 
Since we are on make-up products, here is a list of what you can f ind at drugstores:
And there is one more advantage of specialty stores. Let’s see:
Mascara
Rímel
Foundation
Base
Lipstick 
Batom
MAKE-UP PRODUCTS
Powder Blush
Blush em pó 
Eyeshadow
Sombra para os 
olhos
Concealer
Corretivo
Eyeliner
Delineador para 
os olhos 
116
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
At specialty stores, there are people who can help you choose the right make-up for you. 
Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você. 
light skin
pele clara
dark skin
pele escura
What color palette would you rather try? 
Que paleta de cores você prefere experimentar? 
I like the nude one. 
Eu gosto da nude. 
I prefer the nude and golden ones. 
Eu prefiro a nude e a dourada. 
To f ind the right foundation, the sales associates 
usually start by assessing your skin tone, such as:
And you can answer:
Notice that the pronoun one replaces the word palette to avoid repetitions in the discourse. 
And, in the plural form, we use ones. For example:
Now you know the cultural aspects of buying 
cosmetics in the U.S and how to buy them.
If you are looking for eye shadows, the sales associate 
might ask you: 
117
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
11/ 7 / 8 / 12 / 2 / 10 / 
1 / 3 / 9 / 5 / 4 / 6
Activity B – Answers
a. cosmetics
b. drugstores
c. foundation
d. specialty store
e. palette
f. golden
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Drugstore
( 2 ) Medication
( 3 ) Cosmetics
( 4 ) Make-up
( 5 ) Anti-dandruff shampoo
( 6 ) Anti-hair loss shampoo
( 7 ) Conditioner
( 8 ) Foundation
( 9 ) Hair mask
( 10 ) Hair dye
( 11 ) Mascara
( 12 ) Lipstick
( ) Rímel
( ) Condicionador
( ) Base
( ) Batom 
( ) Medicamento
( ) Tintura para cabelo
( ) Drogaria
( ) Cosméticos
( ) Máscara de hidratação capilar
( ) Xampu anticaspa
( ) Maquiagem
( ) Xampu antiqueda
a) Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, 
 offer lots of options. 
 Farmácias, que também são chamadas de dro- 
 garias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. 
b) At , there are lots of 
 possibilities that you should take advantage of. 
 Nas drogarias, há várias possibilidades que você 
 deve aproveitar. 
c) Can I test this ?
 Eu posso experimentar essa base? 
d) At , there are people who 
 can help you choose the right make-up for you. 
 Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que 
 podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa 
 para você.
e) What color would you 
 rather try? 
 Que paleta de cores você prefere experimentar? 
f) I prefer the nude and ones. 
 Eu prefiro a nude e a dourada. 
118
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we will talk about the question words what and which, impersonal 
pronouns, and relative pronouns.
Some question words make a difference when it comes to making choices, 
and what and which are two of the most confused ones. Let’s start by trying to 
untangle these concepts. 
In many occasions, what and which are interchangeable. That is, we can choose 
either one, and it won’t change the main idea. Like this, take a look:
In this case, what and which are interchangeable because there are many options 
to choose from, that is, there is a huge variety of moisturizers. 
On the other hand, what and which will not be interchangeable when there are 
few options. In this case, we have got to use which. 
Check it out:
Here, the amount of options is reduced: there are only two moisturizers. 
That’s why we used which. 
We could also say:
WHAT = WHICH
WHAT ≠ WHICH
Which/What moisturizer is good for oily skin? 
Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa? 
Which moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one?
Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco? 
Which of these moisturizers is good: the blue one or the white one? 
Qual desses hidratantes é bom: o azul ou o branco? 
119
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this context, one is not a cardinal number since it is not being used to count 
anything. Here, one is an impersonal pronoun that replaces the singular noun 
lipstick to avoid repetition in the discourse. 
Attention: you may choose to repeat the noun in the sentence or use the pronoun 
one to replace it, but you cannot simply say: 
And the answer will follow the same logic. Check it out:
In this sentence, we used the expression Which of to refer to a group of things 
from which we will choose. In this case, moisturizers. Again, we use which for a 
limited number of options. 
Which can also be combined with the impersonal pronoun one to avoid 
repeating the noun. Observe the following dialogue: 
Which?
Qual?
Customer: The red one. / The red.
Cliente: O vermelho. 
ONE – IMPERSONAL PRONOUN
Customer: I’d like that lipstick, please. 
Cliente: Eu gostaria daquele batom, por favor
Salesperson: Which one? / Which lipstick? 
Vendedor(a): Qual? / Qual deles? / Qual batom? 
In the previous example, we used one to replace a word in the singular: lipstick. 
If the noun is in the plural, then, we use ones. Once again, ones does not work as 
a cardinal number in this context. Check out this next dialogue: 
120
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
ONES – IMPERSONAL PRONOUN
Here, we are talking about palettes, in the plural. So, we use the impersonal 
pronouns ones in the plural too. And the answer is in the plural as well. 
There is anotheruse for which that does not refer to choices or to 
defining objects.
Take a look at these pieces of information:
We could say these sentences as they are, separately, but it would be repetitive to say pharmacies twice. 
Notice that pharmacies is the subject in both sentences, “Pharmacies offer” and “Pharmacies are.” 
We are talking about an establishment, a thing. When a thing is the subject of the sentence and it is 
repeated in a second piece of information, we use which to replace it, joining the two separate sentences into 
one. Take a look:
1 - Pharmacies offer lots of cosmetics options.
1 - Farmácias oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. 
2 - Pharmacies are also called drugstores. 
2 - Farmácias também são chamadas de drogarias. 
Customer: The ones on the top shelf. 
Cliente: As que estão na prateleira de cima.
Customer: I’d like to see those eyeshadow palettes, please. 
Cliente: Eu gostaria de ver aquelas paletas de sombra, por favor. 
Salesperson: Which ones? 
Vendedor(a): Quais? / Quais delas?
Pharmacies, which are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options. 
Farmácias, que / as quais também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. 
WHICH – RELATIVE PRONOUN
121
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
1 - The black mascara is on sale. 
O rímel preto está em promoção.
2 - I love black mascara . 
Eu amo rímel preto. 
WHICH – RELATIVE PRONOUN
The black mascara, which I love, is on sale. 
O rímel preto, que / o qual eu amo, está em promoção. 
WHICH – RELATIVE PRONOUN
Here, which refers back to pharmacies and it works as a relative pronoun. 
If the repeated term is not the subject, but the object of the sentence, just follow 
the same logic. If it is not a person, but a thing or an establishment, we use 
which to join the sentences. Let’s see an example, starting with two separate 
sentences. Check them out:
Black mascara is repeated in both sentences. In the f irst sentence, black 
mascaras is the subject. In the second one, it is the object of the verb. To join 
both, we have got to choose one sentence to replace black mascara with which. 
We will replace it in the second sentence. We will start with the f irst sentence 
and then add which with the second information, right after black mascara. 
Like this:
It is also possible to replace black mascara in the first sentence 
too. It would be like this, check it out:
I love black mascara, which is on sale. 
Eu amo rímel preto, que está em promoção. 
WHICH – RELATIVE PRONOUN
122
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
If the term refers to a person, the relative pronoun will be who. But pay attention: 
who, in this case, is not a question word. Take a look at these sentences:
The repeated term is people, and this is the element of the sentence 
that will be replaced with who, since it refers to individuals, persons, 
not a thing or an establishment. So, we will have: 
As you can notice by now, the relative pronoun comes right after the term it is 
replacing. So, who refers to people. We can say that who is replacing people in 
the sentence where this term is the subject.
There are two more relative pronouns we will cover in this chapter. The f irst one 
is where, and it refers to a place. Check it out:
1 – At specialty stores, there are people. 
1 – Em lojas especializadas, há pessoas. 
2 – The people can help you choose the right make-up for you.
2 – As pessoas podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você. 
At specialty stores, there are people who can help you 
choose the right make-up for you. 
Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar 
a escolher a maquiagem certa para você. 
WHO – RELATIVE PRONOUN
WHO – RELATIVE PRONOUN
Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication. 
Farmácias são lugares aonde você vai para pegar medicamentos. 
WHERE – RELATIVE PRONOUN
123
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
< voltar para o índice
124
Notice that where is not being used as a question word; we are not asking a 
question about location. It refers to the word places, the location to which you go 
to pick up medication. That’s why we have to use where when we replace it in 
the sentence. 
You could just say the whole idea without using the relative pronoun, like this: 
The difference is that it won’t be as emphatic, because the relative pronoun gives emphasis to 
the discourse.
And, last but not least, when we want to emphasize a moment, we use the relative pronoun 
when. Check it out: 
In this case, when refers to Black Friday, that is, the moment at which you can perform an 
action. In this example, buying cosmetics for very good prices. There is no question being asked 
here—when is just connecting two pieces of information, emphasizing the idea that this is the 
best moment to perform the action.
Prefer to buy on Black Friday, when you can get cosmetics at the best prices. 
Prefira comprar na Black Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com os 
melhores preços.
You go to the pharmacy to pick up medication. 
Você vai à farmácia para pegar medicamentos. 
WHEN – RELATIVE PRONOUN
In this chapter, we’ve seen the question words what and which and 
learned how to use impersonal and relative pronouns. If you want 
to learn more about these topics, take a look at the Grammar Guide 
section at the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Impersonal and Indefinite Pronouns Page 207 w
Question Word What Page 260 w
Question Word Which Page 275 w
Relative Pronouns Page 297 w
124
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 6 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Number the sentences according to the function of the words in bold.
( 1 ) Question word
( 2 ) Impersonal pronoun
( 3 ) Relative Pronoun
a) Prefer to buy on Black Friday, when you can get cosmetics at the best prices. ( )
 Prefira comprar na Black Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com 
 os melhores preços.
b) Which moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one? ( ) 
 Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco?
c) Which of these moisturizers is good: the blue one or the white one? ( )
 Qual desses hidratantes é bom: o azul ou o branco? 
d) The ones on the top shelf. ( )
 As que estão na prateleira de cima. 
e) What moisturizer is good for oily skin? ( )
 Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa? 
f) Pharmacies are places where you go to pick up medication. ( )
 Farmácias são lugares aonde você vai para pegar medicamentos. 
a) moisturizer is good for oily skin: the blue one or the white one? 
 Qual hidratante é bom para pele oleosa: o azul ou o branco? 
b) I’d like to see those eyeshadow palettes, please. 
 Eu gostaria de ver aquelas paletas de sombra, por favor. 
 Which ?
 Quais delas?
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word according to the translation.
125
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 6 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
a. 3
b. 2
c. 1
d. 2
e. 1
f. 3
a. Which
b. ones
c. which
d. who
e. where
f. when
Activity A – Answers Activity B – Answers
c) Pharmacies, are also called drugstores, offer lots of cosmetics options. 
 Farmácias, que também são chamadas de drogarias, oferecem muitas opções de cosméticos. 
d) At specialty stores, there are people can help you choose the right make-up 
 for you. 
 Nas lojas especializadas, há pessoas que podem te ajudar a escolher a maquiagem certa para você. 
e) Pharmacies are places you go to pick up medication. 
 Farmácias são lugares onde você vai para pegar medicamentos. 
f) Prefer to buy on Black Friday, you can get cosmetics at the best prices. 
 Prefira comprar naBlack Friday, quando você pode conseguir cosméticos com os melhores preços.
126
< voltar para o índice
Shopping for 
Electronics.
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[At a store, in the electronics department]
Amy:
Electronics are on many international visitors’ wish lists, and yes, there 
are many reasons to purchase your electronics in the U.S.
Lucas:
Oh, yeah! Maybe your camera accidentally took a deep-sea dive in the 
ocean, or maybe someone knocked your smartphone out of your hands 
and it fell onto the ground and shattered into a million pieces, or maybe 
your laptop got crushed when somebody else shoved their carry-on bag 
on the overhead compartment.
Amy:
Or maybe none of that happened and you just want the latest on 
cutting-edge tech.
Lucas:
Or maybe that.
Amy:
But there are some pros and cons.
Lucas:
True, some pros: definitely, when you buy gadgets here you could be 
getting a really fat deal! Depending on where you’re from, you might pay 
a third of the price here than you would in your home country. And even 
if you’re not getting a huge deal on the gadget, the benefit of buying 
gadgets here in the U.S. is that you might be getting something that’s 
brand new, that’s not even available in your home country yet!
SHOPPING FOR ELECTRONICS
In this chapter, we will focus on buying electronics. You will learn a few words 
and sentences related to this topic, such as names of some popular devices, and 
tips on what to say and do when you go shopping for them. As usual, we will also 
present you with some language items that will improve your skills in the English 
language. 
Take a look at the script of Shopping for Electronics.
128
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
But there are some cons to consider, like warranties. Some brands and 
manufacturers will honor international warranties. So, if you’re buying 
out of your home country, that’s a plus, but you do have to check.
Lucas:
And another thing is the power outlet. Chances are that the United 
States uses a different power outlet than you might in your home 
country. So, if you buy a gadget here, you’re going to need to buy an 
adaptor in order to be able to charge it. But if you have weighed the pros 
and cons and you’ve made up your mind, then here’s a couple of tips for 
you.
Amy:
First, you want to check the price. Depending on what you’re looking 
for, if it’s a specif ic brand, going to that brand’s showroom, you might 
be paying full retail value. Because those big, beautiful, showrooms cost 
money. Whereas if you go to an authorized reseller, they might be able 
to offer additional deals, promotional discounts, etc., especially if the 
item is an older model.
Lucas:
And another thing to keep in mind is that, if you’re buying a new gadget, 
and you’re taking it home and going through customs, you might be 
importing the new device into your country. So, you should check your 
country’s limits, because they might want to check a receipt and then 
they will charge you an extra tax on top of what you already paid. So, 
in essence, do your research. Because if you don’t, you end up paying 
more than you actually saved.
[Interviewing a salesperson from the electronics department]
Amy:
OK, now we’re here with Ryan, who works in an electronics department, 
and we’re going to ask him a couple of questions!
Lucas:
So, Ryan, what are some differences in the products that you have? Just 
tells us a little bit about what you can.
Ryan:
In electronics, we sell more than just electronics. We sell TVs, laptops, 
chargers for phones, tablets. But we also sell, maybe, laptop bags, 
or other games or such. So, we sell more than what is just purely 
electronics. Anything that can go with it, maybe, an electronic appliance, 
or something that you think would be convenient if you have something 
electronic in front of you.
129
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lucas:
OK, and do you often get international customers coming in?
Ryan:
Yeah, it does happen. Usually someone who’s from Europe or 
something, that’ll try to look for an adaptor for a wall outlet, something 
to plug in their appliances and whatnot.
Amy:
In America, we sell a lot of second-hand, or what’s called refurbished 
units. Is that something that the store offers?
Ryan:
Yeah, usually if a TV is bought by one customer and for whatever reason 
they return it, maybe it’s damaged or something, we’ll give it to claims, 
then they’ll refurbish it. They’ll make it basically as good as new again, 
but usually, since it was used already, and it was refurbished, we’ve got 
a discounted price. So, that does happen with some products. And we’ll 
offer those at a discounted price, so it’s usually good for the consumer 
that way.
Lucas:
And are there still guarantees with products like that?
Ryan:
Yes, there’s still a guarantee. There’s a warranty that can be bought. 
Claims won’t let anything go back here that isn’t pretty much as good 
as new. It’s just that: if a consumer or customer wants one thing that’s 
refurbished, or a brand-new product, they'll get the brand-new product, 
so we still have a discounted price for the refurbished one.
Lucas:
Alright, great! Thanks a lot, Ryan!
Ryan:
No problem, thank you!
130
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
COMPRANDO ELETRÔNICOS
[Em uma loja, no setor de eletrônicos]
Amy:
Eletrônicos estão na lista de desejos de muitos visitantes internacionais, 
e, sim, existem várias razões para comprá-los nos EUA.
Lucas:
Sim! Talvez a sua câmera tenha dado um mergulho no mar, ou talvez 
alguém tenha derrubado seu smartphone das suas mãos e ele caiu 
no chão, se estilhaçando todo! Ou talvez alguém tenha esmagado seu 
laptop ao colocar a bagagem no compartimento superior do avião!
Amy:
Ou talvez nada disso tenha acontecido, e você só quer o que há de novo 
em tecnologia de ponta.
Lucas:
Ou talvez isso!
Amy:
Como sempre, há prós e contras.
Lucas:
É verdade, alguns prós são óbvios. Quando você compra eletrônicos 
aqui, você pode estar economizando muita grana! Dependendo do seu 
país de origem, você pode pagar até um terço do preço aqui, comparado 
com o preço original do produto em seu país. E mesmo que você não 
esteja fazendo um grande negócio, o benefício de comprar eletrônicos 
aqui nos EUA é que você pode estar conseguindo algo novo em folha 
que ainda não está disponível no seu país!
Amy:
Mas temos alguns contras para se levar em consideração, como 
garantias. Algumas marcas cobrem garantias internacionais. Logo, se 
você está comprando algo no exterior, isso é um bom adicional, caso 
seja confirmado.
Lucas:
Outra coisa é a tomada. Muito provavelmente os Estados Unidos 
usam um padrão de tomada diferente do que você usa no seu país de 
origem. Logo, se você comprar um eletrônico aqui, talvez precise de um 
adaptador para conseguir carregá-lo. Se você já pesou os prós e contras 
e se decidiu, temos algumas dicas para você.
131
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Primeiramente, confira o preço. Dependendo do que você estiver 
procurando, se for uma marca específ ica e você for a um showroom, 
talvez tenha que pagar o preço cheio, porque essas lojas enormes e 
lindas custam dinheiro. Mas se você for a um revendedor autorizado, 
talvez eles consigam te oferecer alguma promoção ou desconto, 
principalmente se o artigo for de um modelo antigo.
Lucas:
Outra coisa a se considerar é que, se você está comprando um 
eletrônico, levando-o para casa e passando pela alfândega, você pode 
estar importando esse novo aparelho para seu país. Logo, confira os 
limites alfandegários do seu país, porque eles podem pedir a nota f iscal, 
para então cobrar um imposto sobre o valor que você já pagou. Ou 
seja, pesquise. Caso contrário, você pode acabarpagando mais do que 
economizou!
[Entrevistando um vendedor do setor de eletrônicos]
Amy:
Agora estamos aqui com o Ryan, que trabalha no departamento de 
eletrônicos, e vamos lhe fazer algumas perguntas!
Lucas:
Ryan, quais algumas diferenças dos produtos que você tem à venda? 
Conte-nos um pouco sobre eles!
Ryan:
No setor de eletrônicos, vendemos mais do que somente eletrônicos. 
Vendemos TVs, laptops, carregadores para telefones e tablets, mas 
também vendemos mochilas para laptop, jogos... Logo, vendemos mais 
do que produtos eletrônicos. Qualquer coisa que possamos vender junto 
com um eletrônico, ou algo que achamos que possa ser conveniente se 
você estiver diante de algum eletrônico.
Lucas:
OK, e você recebe muitos clientes internacionais?
Ryan:
Sim, recebemos. Normalmente é algum europeu, por exemplo, 
procurando por um adaptador de tomada, algo para ligar seus 
aparelhos...
Amy:
Nos Estados Unidos, vendemos muita coisa de segunda mão, o que 
chamamos de unidades recondicionadas. Vocês vendem elas aqui?
132
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Ryan
Sim, se uma televisão foi comprada por um cliente e, por qualquer 
razão, ela foi devolvida, talvez por algum defeito ou algo do tipo, nós 
a encaminhamos para o setor responsável, e eles fazem os reparos. 
Eles vão deixar o aparelho como novo. Mas, por ele já ter sido usado e 
recondicionado, nós damos um desconto no preço. Isso acontece com 
alguns produtos, e oferecemos eles com preços mais baixos, o que 
acaba sendo bom para o consumidor!
Lucas:
Esses produtos têm garantia?
Ryan:
Sim, você pode comprar uma garantia. Nada volta à venda sem que 
esteja como novo. É assim: se um cliente ou consumidor quer um 
produto recondicionado, ou novo em folha, ele escolhe o zerado. Então, 
ainda temos o preço com desconto para o recondicionado!
Lucas:
Beleza, ótimo! Muito obrigado, Ryan
Ryan:
Sem problemas, eu que agradeço!
133
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 7 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
In this chapter, we are going to see some vocabulary related to electronics. 
The word technophiles refers to people who love technology and don’t miss a launch:
The United States still attracts many electronics buyers. Look at a list of some of the most-
wanted products:
They are always after the latest cutting-edge tech. 
Eles sempre estão atrás das tecnologias avançadas mais atuais. 
ELECTRONICS
cell phones
telefones celulares
video game consoles 
and joysticks 
consoles de vídeogame 
e controles 
laptop computers / 
notebooks
computadores portáteis 
earphones
fones de ouvido 
flat-screen TVs 
televisões de tela plana 
speakers 
caixas de som
134
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
The warranty might not apply to your home country. 
A garantia pode não ser válida no seu país de origem. 
You may find products that haven’t been launched in your home country yet.
Você pode encontrar produtos que ainda não foram lançados no seu país de origem.
The plug might not fit the power outlet you have back home. 
O plugue do aparelho pode não encaixar na tomada que você tem em casa.
Some products have free technical assistance during warranty. 
Alguns produtos têm assistência técnica gratuita durante a garantia. 
They can be either repaired or replaced in case of defect. 
Eles podem ser consertados ou trocados em caso de defeito. 
But there are some things to consider when shopping for electronics abroad. 
For example:
Another thing to keep in mind is the warranty:
But some companies don’t offer international coverage, which means that:
Here are some advantages of buying electronics in the U.S.:
You might have to buy an adaptor to be able to charge the device. 
Você pode precisar comprar um adaptador para conseguir carregar o aparelho. 
Depending on where you shop in the U.S., you might get big fat deals.
Dependendo de onde comprar nos EUA, você pode conseguir belos descontos.
Depending on the situation, you might pay one third of the price you would back home. 
Dependendo da situação, você pode pagar um terço do preço que você pagaria em casa.
135
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
If the product you want is still too expensive, you may opt for second-hand refurbished items: 
Stores commonly buy used products or with minor damages and resell them. 
É comum que as lojas comprem produtos usados ou com pequenos defeitos e os revendam.
Always keep the receipt. 
Sempre guarde a nota f iscal. 
These products have warranty too. You should check their coverage just the 
same. And no matter which electronics you buy, refurbished or brand-new:
In this chapter, you’ve seen saw how to buy electronics in 
the U.S. and learned some vocabulary related to it. 
They will be as good as new for a lower price. 
Esses produtos estarão tão bons quanto os novos, por um preço menor. 
They repair the damage before reselling the product.
Elas consertam os defeitos antes de revender o produto.
136
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
5/ 11 / 9 / 12 / 4 / 1 / 
6 / 2 / 8 / 10 / 7 / 3
Activity B – Answers
a. the latest
b. plug
c. adaptor
d. big fat deals
e. lower price
f. receipt
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Big fat deals
( 2 ) Cutting-edge 
 tech
( 3 ) The latest
( 4 ) Notebook
( 5 ) Cell phone
( 6 ) Flat-screen TV
( 7 ) Earphones
( 8 ) Joystick
( 9 ) Speakers
( 10 ) Power outlet
( 11 ) Device
( 12 ) Warranty
( ) Telefone celular
( ) Aparelho
( ) Caixas de som
( ) Garantia 
( ) Computador portátil
( ) Belos descontos
( ) TV de tela plana
( ) Tecnologia 
 avançada
( ) Controle de 
 vídeogame
( ) Tomada
( ) Fones de ouvido
( ) As(os) mais atuais
a) They are always after 
 cutting-edge tech. 
 Eles sempre estão atrás das tecnologias 
 avançadas mais atuais. 
b) The might not fit the 
 power outlet you have back home. 
 O plugue do aparelho pode não encaixar na 
 tomada que você tem em casa. 
c) You might have to buy an 
 to be able to charge the device. 
 Você pode precisar comprar um adaptador para 
 conseguir carregar o aparelho. 
d) Depending on where you shop in the U.S., you 
 might get .
 Dependendo de onde comprar nos EUA, você 
 pode conseguir belos descontos.
e) They will be as good as new for a 
 .
 Esses produtos estarão tão bons quanto os novos, 
 por um preço menor. 
f) Always keep the .
 Sempre guarde a nota fiscal. 
137
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we will be talking about the modal verbs may and might and the use of the 
structures will and be + going to to refer to the future.
We have already seen that the structure be + going to is used to refer to plans. For example: 
Both examples convey the idea of plans already made at the moment of speaking. 
They also imply that everything is set for the trip, since it is an event that has been 
planned for some time. 
We can also use be + going to to make a prediction based on present events. 
In other words, there is evidence that this prediction is quite probable to happen. 
Look at this dialogue: 
My friends and I are going to travel to the United States in three months. 
Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses. 
I’m going to buy a new cell phone there. 
Eu vou comprar um celular novo lá.
John: I know we planned to go shopping today. But look at the sky; 
 it’s really cloudy. It’s going to rain soon.
 Eu sei que a gente tinha planejado ir às comprashoje. Mas olha o 
 céu; está muito nublado. Vai chover daqui a pouco.
Anna: No problem, we can go tomorrow.
 Sem problema, a gente pode ir amanhã.
John: Deal.
 Fechado.
BE + GOING TO 
Plans
BE + GOING TO
Prediction Based on Evidence
138
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Based on the evidence that the sky is too cloudy, John made a prediction that it 
is going to rain, so he used be + going to.
We can also predict that something will happen based on previous knowledge 
or experience, not necessarily because of physical evidence, but because it is a 
common or frequent situation. For example, the prices of electronics tend to drop 
on Black Friday, so we can make a prediction based on that. Check it out: 
Once again, we are using the structure be + going to to emphasize that this 
prediction is quite probable.
Another way to refer to the future is by using will. This is the most natural way to 
talk about future events. Will and be + going to differ in structure and use. Let’s 
start with the structure:
On Black Friday, there are going to be big fat deals on electronics. 
Na Black Friday, vai ter descontos muito bons em eletrônicos.
BE + GOING TO
Prediction Based on Experience
WILL
Affirmative Form
Subject + Will + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Will + Verbo Principal + Complemento 
When the subject of the sentence is a subject pronoun, it is possible to contract 
it with will. For example: I will becomes I’ll, you will becomes you’ll, and so on.
Now, look at the structure in the negative form:
WILL
Negative Form
Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Will Not (Won’t) + Verbo Principal + Complemento
139
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
All we have got to do is place not right after will, or we can use won’t, which is 
the contraction of will + not. The contracted form won’t is more frequently used 
in the oral language, and it is more informal.
Finally, the interrogative form:
In the interrogative form, we place will before the subject, then we add the main verb, and 
then the complement.
When we use will to talk about future events, we convey the idea that we have just decided 
to do something. That is the main difference in use when we compare will and be + going to. 
Will expresses an immediate decision, not something we have been planning to do.
For example, let’s suppose a customer is at a store, really interested in a cell phone. Then a 
salesperson approaches the customer to speak well about it. Let’s see:
WILL
Interrogative Form
WILL
Immediate Decision 
Will + Subject + Main Verb + Complement 
Will + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Salesperson: It’s a great cell phone, and it comes with a one-year warranty. 
Vendedor(a): É um ótimo celular, e ele vem com um ano de garantia. 
Customer: OK, I will take it. / OK, I’ll take it.
Cliente: Tudo bem, vou levar o celular.
In this context, it is clear that the customer’s decision was made immediately after 
the salesperson spoke of the advantages of that product. It was not a plan to take 
that specif ic cell phone. 
Notice that the full form is used for emphasis. 
We can also use will to talk about predictions. But when we compare it to be + 
going to in this context, we see that there is a subtle difference between them. 
When we use will to make a prediction, the idea we convey is that we believe 
something will happen based on our opinion and point of view. So, back to the 
dialogue, the salesperson can say something like this: 
140
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
We can see two predictions the salesperson makes: he or she believes the 
customer will love the cell phone and will not regret it. It is the salesperson’s 
opinion that it will happen.
As you can see, it is different from the idea conveyed by be + going to, which 
emphasizes or highlights that there is real evidence to sustain that prediction. 
And that means it is quite probable to happen. 
It goes without saying that when it comes to the future, certainty is questionable, 
and we can only express degrees of probability. 
There are two modal verbs we can use to refer to probability. They are may and 
might. They obey the same structure as any other modal verb. Check it out: 
WILL
Prediction Based on Opinion 
MODAL VERBS 
May and Might
Salesperson: You’ll love this cell phone. You won’t regret it. 
Vendedor(a): Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender. 
Affirmative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal + Complemento. 
Negative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal + Complemento 
Interrogative Form
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento 
141
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
May expresses a probability of around 50% of something happening, and might 
expresses a remote probability, something around 20% or 30%. But remember 
these numbers are just illustrations.
Let’s see some examples. Pay attention to the following dialogue: 
In this case, we are using may because there is a good chance the plug won’t f it 
the power outlet in the customer’s country. So, in this case, an adaptor may be 
necessary.
Let’s continue the dialogue: 
MAY AND MIGHT 
Probability
MAY AND MIGHT 
Probability
Salesperson: The power outlet here may be different from the one 
 used in your country. 
Vendedor(a): A tomada daqui pode ser diferente da usada no seu país. 
Salesperson: You may need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.
Vendedor(a): É possível / Pode ser que você precise de um adaptador 
 para carregar o telefone. 
Customer: That’s true. Do you sell it here? 
Cliente: É verdade. Vocês vendem aqui? 
Salesperson: We do, but I don’t know if we still have it. I might have 
 one left. I’ll look for it in the back. 
Vendedor(a): Vendemos, mas eu não sei se ainda temos. Talvez / Pode 
 ser que eu ainda tenha um. Vou procurar nos fundos.
He or she is using might to show there is a remote probability that 
they still have one left. Moreover, notice the salesperson is using 
will when saying: I’ll look for it. That conveys the idea that the 
salesperson has just decided to check it for the customer.
In the affirmative form, might is also very used to give suggestions 
in a subtle way. It is usually followed by wanna, the contracted form of 
want to, before the main verb. Let’s see:
142
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
MIGHT WANNA + VERB 
Suggestion
You might wanna compare prices before buying electronics in the United States. 
É uma boa ideia comparar preços antes de comprar eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos. 
You might wanna check if the manufacturer offers international warranty. 
É aconselhável verif icar se o fabricante oferece garantia internacional. 
In this chapter, we talked about the modal verbs may and 
might; we also learned how to use the structures will and be 
+ going to to refer to the future. If you want to learn more 
about these topics, look at the Grammar Guide section at the 
end of your book. 
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Be + Going To (Future) Page 193 w
Modal Verb May Page 221 w
Modal Verb Might Page 224 w
Will Page 327 w
< voltar para o índice
143143
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 7 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Choose the most suitable idea conveyed by the sentences.
a) On Black Friday, there are going to be big fat deals on electronics. 
 Na Black Friday, vai ter descontos muito bons em eletrônicos.( ) Prediction based on experience
 ( ) Probability
b) You might wanna compare prices before buying electronics in the United States. 
 É uma boa ideia comparar preços antes de comprar eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos. 
 
 ( ) Plan
 ( ) Suggestion
c) You’ll love this cell phone. You won’t regret it. 
 Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender. 
 
 ( ) Prediction based on opinion 
 ( ) Prediction based on evidence 
d) You may need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.
 Pode ser que você precise de um adaptador para carregar o telefone. 
 
 ( ) Probability 
 ( ) Suggestion 
e) My friends and I are going to travel to the United States in three months. 
 Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses. 
 ( ) Immediate decision 
 ( ) Plan 
144
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 7 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
Activity A – Answers
a. Prediction based on experience 
b. Suggestion
c. Prediction based on opinion 
d. Probability
e. Plan
Activity B – Answers
a. might wanna / might want to 
b. will love / ’ll love
c. may/might 
d. going to travel
e. It is (it’s) going to rain / It’s gonna rain 
a) You check if the manufacturer offers international warranty. 
 É aconselhável verif icar se o fabricante oferece garantia internacional. 
 
b) You this cell phone. You won’t regret it. 
 Você vai amar esse celular. Você não vai se arrepender. 
c) You need an adaptor to charge the cell phone.
 É possível que você precise de um adaptador para carregar o telefone. 
d) My friends and I are to the United States in three months. 
 Meus amigos e eu vamos viajar para os Estados Unidos em três meses. 
e) I know we planned to go shopping today. But look at the sky; it’s really cloudy soon.
 Eu sei que a gente tinha planejado ir às compras hoje. Mas olha o céu; está muito nublado. Vai chover 
 daqui a pouco.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
145
< voltar para o índice
Shopping for 
Appliances.
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[At a store, in the home appliances section]
Amy:
Chances are, if you’re an international visitor, you’re probably not 
shopping for large appliances like laundry machines, refrigerators, and 
dishwashers.
Lucas:
But you do have the chance to browse around some of the American 
brands! Now, on the other hand, small household appliances like juicers, 
or blenders, food processors, or small domestic robots… those might 
very well be on your wish list.
Amy:
And you’ll have a lot of options to choose from: different brands, models, 
and price ranges. If you do your research, you’ll f ind some really good 
deals! So, here’s another piece of information that’ll help you save some 
bucks. There are sales going on in the city all the time, all throughout the 
year. But there are certain times of the year that seasonal items will go 
on additional sales.
Lucas:
And it’s usually during or after holidays. National holidays and some 
other special days are a really good time to go shopping. Like Black 
Friday!
Amy:
Or Christmas! That’s another good one, when there are sales right 
around then and in other countries too.
SHOPPING FOR APPLIANCES
In this chapter, we will learn some tips on the best moments to go shopping in the 
U.S., as well as some words and sentences related to buying home appliances.
Now look at the script of Shopping for Appliances.
147
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Lucas:
So, there are a lot of national holidays that are specif ic to the United 
States that international travelers may not even know about. So, for 
example, Martin Luther King Day falls on the 3rd Monday of January, 
every year. And this is a really good holiday to get home décor and 
clothing.
Amy:
If you’re looking for jewelry, February is your month!
Lucas:
Oh, yeah! So, Valentine’s day falls on February 14th, which means that, 
from February 15th, all the way to the end of the month, you’re going to 
get some really big deals on jewelry, up to half price on jewelry!
Amy:
If you’re looking for appliances, then your month is May! Memorial Day 
falls on the last Monday of May, and it’s our holiday to celebrate our 
fallen soldiers!
Lucas:
And this long, three-day weekend is an excellent time to get appliances!
Amy:
Although, to be honest, there are sales going on all the time. There’s so 
much competition! So, pretty much whatever you’re looking for, there’s 
going to be a deal somewhere if you just look for it!
[Interviewing a sales associate from an appliance store]
Lucas:
Hey, everybody! So, I have Gregory right here, what kind of store do you 
work at?
Gregory:
It’s an appliance store.
Lucas:
So, do you often have international customers come in?
Gregory:
Yeah, we do, we do!
Lucas:
What tips might you have for them? For international customers?
148
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Gregory:
I would say that if you’re looking to buy supplies of any type and you’re 
an international customer, I would come in the fall or the spring. It’s 
typically the time of the year when things are discounted.
Lucas:
Oh, really? So, you’re saying that the products are cheaper in the fall or 
the spring?
Gregory:
It’s because in the winter, typically things are priced up for the holidays. 
And then, in the summer, people are typically building things.
Lucas:
And you don’t really...I’m not sure if you do or not, but do you often have 
international customers buying some of those larger products?
Gregory:
You know, we typically don’t! Because it’s hard to ship those things back. 
You can sometimes get warranties on certain items for international 
shipping, but it really just depends on the item.
Lucas:
Good to know! Cool! Thanks, Gregory!
Gregory:
Thanks!
COMPRANDO ELETROPORTÁTEIS
[Em uma loja, no setor de eletroportáteis]
Amy:
É bem provável que, por ser um visitante estrangeiro, você não esteja 
à procura de eletrodomésticos grandes, como lavadoras de roupas, 
geladeiras ou lava-louças. 
Lucas:
Porém, você tem a oportunidade de dar uma olhada em marcas 
americanas! Por outro lado, eletroportáteis como espremedores de fruta, 
liquidif icadores, processadores de comida, ou pequenos robôs podem 
estar na sua lista de desejos!
149
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Amy:
Você terá muitas opções para escolher, faixas de preço, marcas e 
modelos diferentes! Se você pesquisar bem, vai encontrar ótimas 
promoções! Aqui vai mais um conselho que vai te ajudar a poupar 
alguns dólares! Há promoções acontecendo a toda hora, durante o ano 
todo! Mas em algumas épocas do ano alguns itens sazonais entram em 
promoção! 
Lucas:
Isso acontece geralmente durante ou após as festas de f im de ano. 
Feriados nacionais e outras datas especiais são ótimas oportunidades 
para negócios! Como a Black Friday!
Amy:
Ou o Natal! Essa é outra boa data, há sempre promoções nessa época, 
assim como em outros países. 
Lucas:
Existem vários feriados específ icos aos Estados Unidos que os turistas 
talvez não conheçam. Por exemplo, o Dia de Martin Luther King sempre 
cai na terceira segunda de janeiro de todo ano. E esse é um ótimo 
feriado para comprar objetos de decoração e roupas.
Amy:
Se você está procurando por joias, fevereiro é o seu mês!
Lucas:
Sim, o Dia de São Valentim é 14 de fevereiro, o que signif ica que, a 
partir de 15 de fevereiro até o f inal do mês, você vai encontrar ótimas 
promoções de joias. Algo como 50% de desconto!
Amy:
Se você está à procura de eletrodomésticos, maio é o melhor mês! O 
Memorial Day cai na última segunda de maio, e é o feriado em que 
celebramos nossos soldados mortos em guerras. 
Lucas:
Esse feriado prolongado é uma época ótima para comprar 
eletrodomésticos!
Amy:
Mas sendo bemsincera, existem promoções durante o ano todo, a toda 
hora. É um mercado competitivo! Qualquer que seja o artigo que você 
procura, deve haver alguma promoção. É só procurar bem!
150
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Entrevistando um vendedor]
Lucas:
Pessoal, este é o Gregory; em que tipo de loja você trabalha?
Gregory:
Em uma loja de eletrodomésticos.
Lucas:
Você recebe turistas com frequência?
Gregory:
Sim, recebemos!
Lucas:
Que dicas você tem para eles? Para clientes estrangeiros...
Gregory:
Eu aconselharia que, se você quer comprar eletrodomésticos de 
qualquer tipo e você é um cliente estrangeiro, venha no outono ou 
na primavera. É normalmente a época do ano em que temos mais 
descontos.
Lucas:
É mesmo? Você está dizendo que os produtos são mais baratos no 
outono e na primavera?
Gregory:
É porque, durante o inverno, os preços são mais altos por causa das 
festas de f im de ano. E durante o verão há muitas pessoas fazendo 
reformas.
Lucas:
E você não... Eu não sei ao certo, mas é normal ver turistas comprando 
eletrodomésticos maiores?
Gregory:
Normalmente não, porque é dif ícil despachar esses artigos. Às vezes 
você consegue garantias internacionais para alguns artigos, mas isso 
depende muito do produto.
Lucas:
Legal, bom saber! Obrigado, Gregory!
Gregory:
Obrigado!
151
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 8 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
National holidays affect the prices of products in the United States: 
Martin Luther King Day is one of the most important American national holidays:
Valentine’s Day is the day of love in the U.S.:
People exchange gifts, cards, and flowers, and they often propose 
to their sweethearts. As a consequence: 
On national holidays we often find products with big discounts.
Nos feriados nacionais, nós frequentemente encontramos produtos 
com grandes descontos. 
Martin Luther King Day is celebrated on the third Monday of January. 
O Dia de Martin Luther King é celebrado na terceira segunda-feira de janeiro.
Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th. 
O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro. 
From February 15th to the end of the month, jewelry is sold for lower prices. 
De 15 de fevereiro até o f im do mês, as joias são vendidas por preços mais baixos. 
It’s a great moment to buy home décor and clothing items. 
É uma época ótima para comprar artigos de decoração e roupas.
152
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Memorial Day is celebrated on the last Monday of May.
O Memorial Day é celebrado na última segunda-feira de maio.
Black Friday is on the fourth Friday of November, right after Thanksgiving.
A Black Friday é na quarta sexta-feira de novembro, logo depois do Dia de Ação de Graças.
Two holidays are considered the best ones for shopping for electronics and appliances. 
The f irst one is Memorial Day:
The other one is Black Friday:
As for small appliances, in the U.S it is possible to f ind a lot of options, such as:
SMALL APPLIANCES
Blender 
Liquidif icador 
Electric juicer 
Espremedor de 
frutas 
Food processor 
Processador de 
alimentos 
If you want to buy TVs and laptops, Memorial Day sales will be the best choice for you.
Se quiser comprar TVs e notebooks, o Memorial Day vai ser a melhor opção para você.
If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday. 
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday. 
Toaster 
Torradeira 
Air fryer 
Fritadeira sem óleo 
Vacuum cleaner 
Aspirador de pó 
Robot vacuum cleaner 
Robô aspirador 
153
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
And there are great options of large appliances too. Let’s check out some of them:
LARGE APPLIANCES
Stove 
Fogão 
Washing machine 
Lavadora de roupas 
Dishwasher
Lava-louças 
Refrigerator 
Geladeira
Oven
Forno 
The voltage in the U.S. is different from the one in many other countries:
Most appliances and devices in the United States are 120v.
A maioria dos eletrodomésticos e eletrônicos nos Estados Unidos 
tem voltagem de 120v.
You’d better look for dual voltage appliances.
É melhor procurar por eletrodomésticos bivolt. 
154
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
In this chapter, you’ve learned some of the best moments 
to go shopping in the U.S., as well as some vocabulary 
and sentences related to appliances.
To learn about the voltage, you can ask one of these questions:
And you might also want to know about the warranty:
Excuse me. What’s the voltage of this toaster? 
Com licença. Qual a voltagem dessa torradeira?
Is there any warranty? 
Tem alguma garantia?
Do you have dual-voltage appliances? 
Você tem aparelhos bivolt? 
Does it have international warranty? 
Ele tem garantia internacional? 
155
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Small appliances
( 2 ) Stove
( 3 ) Refrigerator/ 
 Fridge
( 4 ) Toaster
( 5 ) Food processor
( 6 ) Vacuum cleaner
( 7 ) Blender
( 8 ) Electric juicer
( 9 ) Oven
( 10 ) Dishwasher
( 11 ) Washing 
 machine
( 12 ) Voltage
( ) Fogão
( ) Espremedor de 
 frutas
( ) Processador de 
 alimentos
( ) Voltagem 
( ) Eletroportáteis
( ) Torradeira
( ) Forno
( ) Lavadora de roupas
( ) Liquidif icador
( ) Geladeira
( ) Lava-louças
( ) Aspirador de pó
a) Martin Luther King Day is celebrated on the third of January. 
 O Dia de Martin Luther King é celebrado na terceira segunda-feira de janeiro. 
b) Valentine’s Day is celebrated on 14th. 
 O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro. 
c) So, from February 15th to the end of the month, is sold for lower prices.
 Então, de 15 de fevereiro até o fim do mês, as joias são vendidas por preços mais baixos. 
d) If you want to buy video games and , you’ll find good deals on Black Friday. 
 Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday.
e) Excuse me. What’s the of this toaster? 
 Com licença. Qual a voltagem dessa torradeira? 
f) Does it have international ?
 Ele tem garantia internacional? 
Activity A – Answers
2/ 8 / 5 / 12 / 1 / 4 / 
9 / 11 / 7 / 3 / 10 / 6
Activity B – Answers
a. Monday
b. February
c. jewelry
d. small appliances
e. voltage
f. warranty
156
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we are going to talk about conditionals, the modal verb would, 
the simple past, and regular and irregular verbs.
Conditionals are sentences that mention known facts or hypothetical situations 
and their consequences. There is more than one kind of conditional sentences. 
Let’s start with the zero conditional. It is used to talk about facts, for it expresses 
the idea that a situation repeatedly happens the same way. For example:
This is an unquestionable relationship of cause and consequence that will 
happen again and again. Notice that the condition is in the simple present: you 
heat ice; and so is the consequence: it melts. The word when joins these ideas.
We can use if instead of when. It would be like this:
The zero conditional does not imply a relationship marked at a specif ic time 
in the past, present, or future. It expresses a relationship of cause and 
consequence that is always the same, no matter when it happens. Thus, it can 
also be called real conditional. 
So, the basic structure is:
When you heat ice,it melts. 
Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete. 
If you heat ice, it melts. 
Se você aquecer o gelo, ele derrete. 
ZERO CONDITIONAL 
ZERO CONDITIONAL 
157
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
If + Simple Present Simple Present
 cause consequence
Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is always the same. 
Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é sempre a mesma. 
But the first conditional is a bit different. We use it to talk about a result or 
consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
Suppose you are going to travel to the U.S. soon, so you are thinking about all the 
shopping you are going to do there. You can say:
Here, there is a condition starting with If, and even though it is something you are only 
imagining, it is totally possible to happen. You can save some money until the day you leave so 
you will be able to afford the appliances you want.
The consequence of having the money will be to buy some small appliances. The imaginary 
condition is in the simple present and the result is in the future, so we use will to indicate it.
The first conditional follows a basic structure: 
ZERO CONDITIONAL = REAL CONDITIONAL
If I have the money, I will buy some small appliances. 
Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis. 
FIRST CONDITIONAL
If + Simple Present Will
 condition consequence
Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is imaginary, but possible to happen. 
Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é imaginária, mas possível de acontecer. 
FIRST CONDITIONAL
158
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The condition is in the simple present, introduced by If, and the consequence is in the future, expressed 
with will. Let’s see some examples:
In both sentences, we introduced the condition using If, conjugated the verb in 
the simple present, and the consequence was formed with will. Both state an 
imaginary situation that is possible to happen. 
Now, let’s see another relationship of condition and consequence that is also 
imaginary, but, this time, not possible to happen: the second conditional. 
In this case, both the condition and the consequence are hypothetical. To 
express that, the condition is in the simple past, and the consequence is 
formed with the modal verb would. This is the basic structure: 
If you want to buy TVs and laptops, Memorial Day sales will be the best choice for you. 
Se quiser comprar TVs e notebooks, o Memorial Day vai ser a melhor opção para você.
FIRST CONDITIONAL
If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday. 
Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday. 
If + Simple Past Would
 condition consequence
Use: the relationship of cause and consequence is imaginary and 
 impossible to happen. 
Uso: a relação de causa e consequência é imaginária e impossível de 
 acontecer. 
SECOND CONDITIONAL
But before we continue, let’s understand the verb forms involved in the 
formation of the second conditional.
Let’s start with the simple past of the verb to be. As usual, the verb To Be has its 
own rules. Check out the aff irmative form:
159
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
As you can see, there are only two possible conjugations: was or were. 
The aff irmative form does not admit contractions.
Now, observe the negative form:
To form the negative, we add not right after the verb. It admits contractions only 
between the verb and the particle not.
Now, take a look at the interrogative form:
SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE 
Affirmative Form
SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE 
Negative Form
I was you were he/she/it was 
we were you were they were
I was not 
(wasn’t)
you were not 
(weren’t)
he/she/it was not 
(wasn’t)
we were not 
(weren’t)
you were not 
(weren’t)
they were not 
(weren’t)
SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE 
Interrogative Form 
was I…? were you…? was he/she/it…? 
were we…? were you…? were they…? 
160
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Observe that, to form the interrogative, we invert the verb and the subject, 
following the same logic as in the simple present of the verb to be. Have a look at 
an example:
Here, we have Joe as the subject, which is equivalent to he, so we used was. 
There is yet another subject in this sentence: they. It refers to new appliances. 
Therefore, the verb to be was conjugated as were.
For the simple past of the other verbs, we will follow the same logic as the 
simple present for the other verbs. 
Let’s see the general structure of the simple past. First, the affirmative form:
SIMPLE PAST – VERB TO BE 
Joe was at the store to buy new appliances because they were on sale. 
O Joe estava na loja para comprar novos eletrodomésticos porque eles 
estavam em promoção. 
Subject + Main Verb (Past) + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo Principal no Passado + Complemento
For example:
Joe liked the blender and the juicer. 
O Joe gostou do liquidif icador e do espremedor de frutas. 
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS
Affirmative Form 
161
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
To buy is an irregular verb, and its form in the past is bought.
Now, let’s see the structure in the negative form. Look:
Just like with the simple present, we need an auxiliary verb here. In the simple 
past, the auxiliary verb is did, which is the verb do in the past. Then, after the 
auxiliary did, we add not. And there is also the contracted form didn’t.
And, once again, just like the simple present, when we use the auxiliary verb, 
the main verb remains in its base form. Check out this example:
Subject + Auxiliary Verb Did + Not (Didn’t) + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement 
Sujeito + Verbo Auxiliar Did + Not (Didn’t) + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
Joe didn’t have enough money to buy both the blender and the juicer. 
O Joe não tinha dinheiro o suficiente para comprar o liquidif icador e o 
espremedor de frutas. 
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
Negative Form
You know that verbs in the past are divided into two groups: regular verbs, to which we add 
-ed, -ied, or -d, depending on the base form. And irregular verbs, which don’t follow a pattern, 
so each verb has its own past form.
In the example, we have the verb to like, which is regular. So, we used liked.
Let’s see an example with an irregular verb now:
Joe bought only the blender. 
Joe comprou só o liquidif icador.
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
162
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
As you can see, the auxiliary verb did is placed before the subject. 
Look at the example:
Notice that we started the sentence with the auxiliary verb did; then we added 
Joe as the subject; then, the verb buy in its base form.
Bear in mind that the simple past will be necessary to form the second 
conditional, which is the main focus here. Besides that, as you already know, we 
will also need the modal verb would.
The basic structure we use for would follows the same rules as every modal 
verb. Let’s see:
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
Did Joe buy the blender and the juicer?
O Joe comprou o liquidif icador e o espremedor de frutas? 
WOULD
Affirmative Form
Subject + Would + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Would + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Negative Form
Subject + Would + Not (Wouldn’t) + Main Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Would + Not (Wouldn’t) + Verbo Principal + ComplementoInterrogative Form
Would + Subject + Main Verb + Complement
Would + Sujeito + Verbo Principal + Complemento
Notice that we used didn’t and the verb have in its base form.
Finally, the interrogative form:
Auxiliary Verb Did + Subject + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement 
Verbo auxiliar Did + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento 
SIMPLE PAST – OTHER VERBS 
Interrogative Form
163
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Here, if introduces the condition expressed in the simple past. That means that Joe, in fact, 
doesn’t have more money. And if this condition is imaginary, the result can only be imaginary 
too. It is just a hypothesis. That’s why we use would to refer to the consequence. Buying two 
appliances can only happen in Joe’s imagination.
So, in short, this sentence expresses a situation that is imaginary but impossible. 
There is just one little detail about the second conditional—when we express an imaginary 
condition using the verb to be, there is a change in the conjugation. 
As you know, the conjugation of the verb to be can be either was or were. But in this case, 
we will only use were. You can even hear some people saying was, but it is not grammatically 
correct. Let’s see an example: 
SECOND CONDITIONAL
If I had more money, I would buy the blender and the juicer.
Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidif icador e o espremedor de frutas. 
SECOND CONDITIONAL
If I were Joe, I would save money before going shopping. 
Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras. 
As a modal verb, would accompanies the main verb, altering the tone of the sentence. Would 
conveys an idea of hypothesis to the verb. We use would to talk about things that we wanted to 
happen, but that are not really possible.
Now that we have learned the verb forms we needed, let’s see how the second conditional works.
In the previous examples, we referred to Joe. He wanted to buy two appliances but ended up 
taking just one. When he got to the checkout, he may have thought:
164
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we talked about conditionals, the modal verb would, 
the simple past, and regular and irregular verbs. If you want to learn 
more about these topics, look at the Grammar Guide section at the end 
of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
Conditionals Page 197 w
Irregular Verbs – Past Page 212 w
Modal Verb Would Page 229 w
Regular Verbs Page 293 w 
Simple Past – Other Verbs Page 304 w
Notice two things:
1. It is a hypothetical situation, because I can’t be Joe. That is only possible in my 
imagination;
2. The conjugation of the verb to be in the simple past for the first person 
singular is generally was. But, in this case, we have to use were, no matter who 
the subject of the sentence is. 
Conditionals are very much used in everyday English. The most important thing 
is to understand the idea each one of them conveys and to use the correct verb 
form to express that.
< voltar para o índice
165165
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 8 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Choose the most suitable idea conveyed by the sentences.
a) If I have the money, I will buy some small appliances. 
 Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis. 
 ( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
 ( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
b) When you heat ice, it melts. 
 Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete.
 ( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
 ( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
c) If I had more money, I would buy the blender and the juicer. 
 Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidif icador e o espremedor de frutas. 
 
 ( 1 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
 ( 2 ) Hypothetical situation that is only possible in one’s imagination.
d) If you heat ice, it melts. 
 Se você aquecer o gelo, ele derrete. 
 
 ( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
 ( 2 ) Hypothetical situation that is only possible in one’s imagination.
e) If you want to buy video games and small appliances, you’ll find good deals on Black Friday. 
 Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas ofertas na Black Friday. 
 ( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
 ( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
166
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 8 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
a.
 2
 
b.
 1
c.
 2
 
d.
 1
e.
 2
f. 
1
a.
 m
el
ts
b.
 I 
w
ill 
(I’
ll)
 b
uy
c.
w
an
t 
d.
 b
ou
gh
t
e.
 w
ou
ld
 b
uy
 / 
’d
 b
uy
 
f. 
w
er
e
A
ct
iv
ity
 A
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
A
ct
iv
ity
 B
 –
 A
ns
w
er
s
f) If I were Joe, I would save money before going shopping. 
 Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras. 
( 1 ) Relationship of cause and consequence that is always the same.
( 2 ) Result or consequence of an imaginary but possible situation.
a) When you heat ice, it . 
 Quando você aquece o gelo, ele derrete. 
b) If I have the money, some small appliances. 
 Se eu tiver dinheiro, eu vou comprar alguns eletroportáteis. 
c) If you to buy video games and small appliances, 
 you’ll f ind good deals on Black Friday. 
 Se você quiser comprar vídeogames e eletroportáteis, você vai achar boas 
 ofertas na Black Friday. 
d) Joe only the blender. 
 Joe comprou só o liquidif icador. 
e) If I had more money, I the blender and the juicer. 
 Se eu tivesse mais dinheiro, eu compraria o liquidif icador e o espremedor de 
 frutas. 
f) If I Joe, I would save money before going shopping. 
 Se eu fosse o Joe, eu economizaria dinheiro antes de ir às compras. 
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
167
< voltar para o índice
Online 
Shopping.
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Amy and Lucas are on a busy street]
Amy:
Did you know that recent surveys have shown that over 80% of 
Americans have already shopped online? It’s not just a trend, it’s actually 
a behavioral shift. And every day there are more and more things 
offered for sale online.
Lucas:
So, in the U.S., you can buy online pretty much anything that you can 
buy in a physical store. I mean, you can get gadgets, appliances, clothes, 
even groceries.
Amy:
And like everything else in life, there are pros and cons. Online, you can 
price compare between a dozen stores in minutes, versus taking hours 
driving around brick and mortar stores.
Lucas:
And you know what? The other thing is that online, you have a lot more 
options. But a brick and mortar store is going to be limited by space, so 
they’re not going to have as much stock.
Amy:
Speaking of cons, when you do shop online, you don’t get to try things on.
Lucas:
That is true, but chances are you’re going to find any brand or model that 
you’re looking for, and at a good price, even with the shipping fees included.
Amy:
But also, if shopping online, especially if you’re an international visitor, 
In this chapter, we will learn some words and sentences related to shopping 
online, as well as some language items to help you improve your English skills. 
Now look at the script of Online Shopping.
ONLINE SHOPPING
169
< voltar para o índice
Part 1.
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
you have to pay attention to shipping times. Because you need to make 
sure that your item can be delivered during your stay in the U.S.
Lucas:
That’s true, and if you’re staying at a hotel, you need to make sure that 
the hotel knows that you’re expectinga package to be delivered. And 
chances are, your hotel is going to charge you a package delivery fee, 
which could be a lot sometimes. So, make sure that you’re double-
checking with the hotel’s package delivery guidelines f irst.
[Amy is at a coffee shop with her tablet]
Amy:
So, now I’m going to teach you a little more about what I love to do, which 
is online shopping! So, I’m going to introduce you to this website here 
today, and there’s a bunch of popular categories on the homepage, like 
deals and promotions, women’s fashion, men’s fashion, baby fashion...As 
you use the site more, it’ll start to personalize suggestions for you. So, on 
the homepage itself, they’ll start to be a section where it highlights items 
of interest, and it’ll be based off of your prior search history. So, I’m going 
to show how the website has all the categories arranged, and some of 
them are electronics, luggage, pet supplies, pretty much anything you can 
think of! But today, I am in the market for a new smartwatch!
The website’s brought up a couple of options that are the most popular, 
and I’m going to pick the second one because I like the square design, and 
when I click on it, it’s going to show me the entire description of the watch 
from the manufacturer. And then, if you go down a little bit, the website 
will also show you some competitive options that are similar to it! So, then 
you can kind of compare and contrast and see which one you like most. I 
still like this one, so now I’m going to go to the next section, which is really 
important to me, reviews! So, this one has about 1,800 reviews, and this 
is really important to me because when you read about the reviews, you 
can see the real user experience and any issues that you’re concerned 
about, you can look through the reviews to see if they’re addressed by the 
other people. For me, I like this one, and I trust the reviews, so I’m going to 
go ahead and add it to my cart! OK, so this part is really important.
Once you’ve added it to your cart, you’ll also want to consider the 
shipping cost and the shipping time, whether you’re going to get it 
in time or not. I’m going on a trip next week, so I want to make sure I 
get it before I leave. So, I’m going to choose to pay a little bit extra for 
shipping, so that I get it on Monday before I leave for my trip. OK, so I’m 
all set for Monday delivery, I’ve added it to my cart, and I’ve checked out, 
and my watch is on the way!
It’s been a long day! I hope you’ve enjoyed our insider tips for shopping 
in L.A. and in the U.S.! Bye!
170
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
COMPRANDO ON-LINE
[Amy e Lucas estão em uma rua movimentada]
Amy:
Você sabia que pesquisas recentes mostram que mais de 80% dos 
americanos já f izeram alguma compra on-line? Isso não é só moda, é 
uma mudança de comportamento. Todos os dias, mais e mais coisas são 
vendidas on-line!
Lucas:
Nos EUA você pode comprar on-line praticamente qualquer coisa que 
você pode comprar em uma loja f ísica. Eletros, roupas, até mesmo 
alimentos.
Amy:
E como tudo na vida, há prós e contras. On-line, você pode comparar 
preços entre dezenas de lojas em minutos, em vez de gastar horas 
percorrendo lojas f ísicas.
Lucas:
Além disso, outra coisa é que on-line você tem muito mais opções. Uma 
loja f ísica é limitada por seu espaço, logo, não terão um estoque grande.
Amy:
Falando em pontos negativos, quando você compra on-line, não tem 
como você provar as coisas.
Lucas:
Isso é verdade, mas as chances são de você achar qualquer marca e 
modelo que procura, com um bom preço, até mesmo incluindo o valor do 
frete.
Amy:
Mas ao comprar on-line, principalmente se você for um visitante 
internacional, você tem que prestar atenção aos prazos de entrega. Você 
precisa ter certeza de que sua encomenda será entregue durante sua 
estadia nos EUA.
Lucas:
É verdade, e se você estiver hospedado em um hotel, você precisa 
garantir que o hotel saiba que você está esperando a entrega de um 
pacote. E provavelmente, seu hotel cobrará uma taxa de recebimento, 
o que, às vezes, pode sair caro. Então não se esqueça de verif icar a 
política de entrega do hotel previamente.
171
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
[Amy está em um café com seu tablet]
Amy:
Agora, vou ensinar um pouco mais sobre algo que amo fazer, que 
é comprar on-line! Vou apresentar esse site para vocês, e há várias 
categorias populares na homepage, como por exemplo, promoções, 
moda masculina, feminina e infantil. À medida que você usa o site, 
ele vai personalizando sugestões para vocês. Na própria homepage, 
surge uma seção onde artigos do seu interesse serão destacados com 
base no seu histórico de pesquisas. Vou mostrar como o site organiza 
as categorias, algumas delas são eletrônicos, malas para viagem, 
acessórios para animais domésticos, praticamente qualquer coisa que 
você possa imaginar! Mas hoje estou à procura de um smartwatch! 
O site me mostrou algumas opções que são as mais populares, e vou 
escolher a segunda porque gosto desse design quadrado; quando eu 
clico nela, me mostram a descrição completa do relógio de acordo com 
o fabricante. Então, descendo um pouco mais, o site também me mostra 
opções competitivas, similares à minha escolha! Dessa forma você pode 
compará-las e decidir de qual gosta mais. Eu ainda gosto da minha 
escolha, então vou seguir para a próxima parte, que é muito importante 
para mim, as avaliações! Este aqui tem cerca de 1.800 avaliações, o 
que é muito importante para mim, porque quando você lê as avaliações, 
você pode ver a verdadeira experiência do usuário, e se qualquer dúvida 
te preocupa, você pode procurar se ela foi abordada por outras pessoas. 
Eu gostei desse aqui e confio nas avaliações, então vou seguir em frente 
e adicioná-lo ao meu carrinho. OK, essa parte é muito importante!
Uma vez que você tenha adicionado o artigo ao carrinho, deve levar 
em conta o valor e tempo de entrega do frete, e se você vai recebê-lo 
a tempo ou não. Vou viajar semana que vem, e quero garantir que ele 
seja entregue antes da minha partida. Então, escolho pagar um pouco 
mais no frete para que eu receba o pacote na segunda antes de viajar. 
OK, tudo certo para a entrega na segunda, adicionei ao carrinho, f iz o 
checkout e meu relógio está a caminho!
Foi um dia longo! Espero que você tenha gostado das nossas dicas para 
fazer compras em Los Angeles e nos EUA! Tchau!
172
< voltar para o índice
Video Script VocabularyChapter 9 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar Activities
Online shopping is very practical, but it is relatively new:
Everything has its pros and cons. Let’s see some advantages or upsides of shopping online:
Now, let’s see some downsides or disadvantages of online shopping:
Online shopping has been around since the 90s. 
Compras pela internet existem desde os anos 90.
You save time, since you can compare prices, products, and stores in minutes. 
Você ganha tempo, já que pode comparar preços, produtos e lojas em minutos.
You have to check the exchange rates, since the purchase will be in dollars.
Você tem que verif icar as taxas de câmbio, uma vez que a compra será em dólares.
There will be a lot more options online, since a store is limited by physical space. 
Vai haver muito mais opções on-line, uma vez que a loja é limitada pelo espaço f ísico.
Most products are cheaper online than at the store. 
A maioria dos produtos on-line é mais barata do que na loja. 
Shipping fees may increase the cost of products. 
As taxas de envio podem encarecer os produtos. 
173
< voltar para o índice
Part 2.
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
Make sure it won’t be delivered after you have left and consider possible delays.
Certif ique-se de que o produto não será entregue depois que você já tiver ido embora, e 
considere possíveis atrasos.
Check the hotel policy for package-receivingfees. 
Verif ique a política de recebimento de pacotes do hotel.
When you are looking for a product, they’ll show you 
some filters to do your research. 
Quando você estiver procurando um produto, eles vão te 
mostrar f iltros para você pesquisar. 
If you buy something that is supposed to be delivered during the time you will be 
abroad, you should consider the following: 
Most shopping websites and apps are user-friendly. They do 
anything to make it easier for people to buy, for example:
Buy beforehand and compare the delivery dates with your trip’s so that the product 
will have already been delivered when you arrive.
Compre com antecedência e compare as datas de entrega com as da sua viagem para 
que o produto já tenha sido entregue quando você chegar.
In case you want to receive your delivery at the hotel you are staying, 
here is what you should do:
Tell the hotel you’re expecting a package, or they won’t receive it. 
Avise ao hotel que você está esperando um pacote, ou eles não vão recebê-lo. 
174
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
This is what you should do in order to have a better experience when shopping online:
Since you can’t try on the items before you buy them, you can read what other 
customers have to say to help you decide on your purchase:
Here are some examples of reviews you may f ind:
After setting your filters, you’ll see the options that have the characteristics you’ve marked. 
Depois que marcar seus f iltros, você verá as opções que têm as características que você marcou.
By clicking on the product, you can see its description with details provided by the manufacturer. 
Ao clicar no produto, você pode ver sua descrição com detalhes fornecidos pelo fabricante.
Some websites also have the option of comparing products.
Alguns sites também têm a opção de comparar produtos.
 Check the reviews to read other customers’ opinions.
 Verif ique os comentários para ler as opiniões de outros clientes. 
User-friendly operational system 
Sistema operacional intuitivo / fácil de mexer
Fit for muddy soils 
Próprio para terrenos com muita lama
Here is a list of common filters: 
ONLINE SHOPPING APP AND WEBSITE FILTERS
Size
Tamanho
Brand 
Marca
Gender 
Gênero
Price
Preço
175
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Activities Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVocabularyVideo Script
In this chapter, you’ve learned the pros and cons of 
shopping online at U.S. websites and apps. You’ve also 
learned the main steps of buying online. 
Remember to check the shipping fee and if the site is 
charging you any tax, like the sales tax.
Lembre-se de conferir a taxa de envio e se o site cobrará 
algum imposto, como o imposto sobre vendas.
Check your address and go for the checkout.
Verif ique o seu endereço e siga para o checkout.
Wait for the order confirmation on your email 
Aguarde a confirmação do pedido em seu e-mail. 
And now, let’s look at the final steps of your online purchase: 
After choosing the product, add it to the cart.
Depois de escolher o produto, adicione-o ao carrinho.
Don’t forget to check the shipping time to see if it fits your planning.
Não se esqueça de verif icar o tempo de envio para ver se está de acordo 
com os seus planos.
176
< voltar para o índice
Vocabulary ActivitiesChapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
Activity A – Answers
5/ 6 / 10 / 1 / 4 / 8 / 
2 / 11 / 3 / 9 / 12 / 7
Activity B – Answers
a. filters
b. Online shopping
c. physical
d. shipping
e. package
f. cart
A. Number the columns according to the translation of the words.
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
( 1 ) Online shopping
( 2 ) Delivery
( 3 ) Package
( 4 ) Fees
( 5 ) Sales taxes
( 6 ) Shipping
( 7 ) Add to cart
( 8 ) Filters
( 9 ) User-friendly
( 10 ) Compare 
 products
( 11 ) Brand
( 12 ) Gender
( ) Imposto sobre 
 vendas
( ) Envio
( ) Comparar produtos
( ) Compras pela 
internet
( ) Taxas
( ) Filtros
( ) Entrega
( ) Marca
( ) Pacote
( ) Intuitivo / Fácil de 
 mexer 
( ) Gênero
( ) Adicionar ao 
carrinho
a) When you are looking for a product, they’ll show you some to do your research. 
 Quando você estiver procurando um produto, eles vão te mostrar filtros para você pesquisar. 
b) has been around since the 90s. 
 Compras pela internet existem desde os anos 90.
c) There will be a lot more options online, since a store is limited by space. 
 Vai haver muito mais opções on-line, uma vez que a loja é limitada pelo espaço físico. 
d) fees may increase the cost of products. 
 As taxas de envio podem encarecer os produtos. 
e) Tell the hotel you’re expecting a , or they won’t receive it. 
 Avise ao hotel que você está esperando um pacote, ou eles não vão recebê-lo. 
f) After choosing the product, add it to the .
 Depois de escolher o produto, adicione-o ao carrinho.
177
< voltar para o índice
Part 3.
Activities
Vocabulary Activities GrammarChapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we are going to talk about the imperative form, the passive 
voice, and verbs in the past participle.
Let’s start with the imperative. We can use it to give instructions, advice, 
orders, and tips. Have a look at the example: 
As you can see, the sentence starts with the verb check, without a subject before 
it. In fact, there is a subject, you, but it is implicit, omitted. It happens because, 
when we use the imperative, we are always talking directly to the person who is 
supposed to do the action.
Let’s see the general structures for the imperative. In the affirmative form, 
we will have:
The complement may or may not 
exist. It will depend on the context 
and the verb. For example:
Check the hotel policy for package-receiving fees. 
Verif ique a política de recebimento de pacotes do hotel. 
Main Verb (+ Complement) 
Verbo Principal (+ Complemento) 
IMPERATIVE 
IMPERATIVE 
Affirmative Form
Go. 
Vá.
IMPERATIVE 
Affirmative Form
178
< voltar para o índice
Part 4.
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
No complement is needed to convey 
the message here, so we only use the 
verb. Now, look at another sentence:
In this sentence, there is a complement, for it is important in the context. 
Now, check out the structure of the negative form:
Notice that we just place don’t before the main verb. It is the same auxiliary 
verb we use in the negative form of the simple present. And once again, we can 
see that the complement may or not be used. Look at the next example:
Go to the mall with your mom.
Vá ao shopping com sua mãe.
Don’t + Main Verb (+ Complement)
Don’t + Verbo Principal (+ Complemento)
Don’t go. 
Não vá. 
IMPERATIVE 
Aff irmative Form
IMPERATIVE 
Negative Form
IMPERATIVE 
Negative Form
No complement is needed here. We only use the verb to send the message. 
Look at this one now:
Don’t forget to check the delivery address. 
Não se esqueça de verif icar o endereço de entrega. 
IMPERATIVE 
Negative Form
179
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The complement is used here because it is important for the context; 
also, the verb allows it.
There is no interrogative form in the imperative. It is also not possible 
to turn it into the passive voice.
The passive voice is a construction that communicates the idea that 
the action is more important than the doer, that is, the person 
who performs the action. It is very used by the media, especially in 
journalistic texts, which emphasize the facts.
It can also be used in situations in which the doer is unknown or 
irrelevant. Let’s see some examples:
The sentence is in the simple present. We know it due to the verb to be, is.
But if Valentine’s Day is celebrated on that specif ic day, it is obviousthat someone celebrates 
it. This sentence doesn’t mention this piece of information, though, because it is not important. 
In this context, knowing what is celebrated and when is more important than learning who 
celebrates it.
But we can mention the doer of the action without emphasizing it. Let’s see how we do it:
Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th. 
O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro. 
PASSIVE VOICE
Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th by the Americans. 
O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro pelos americanos. 
PASSIVE VOICE
As you can see, we just add the preposition by followed by the agent of the 
passive, in this case, the Americans. The agent of the passive indicates the one 
who performs the action. So now we know who celebrates Valentine’s Day 
because we have the agent of the passive at the end of the sentence.
180
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Notice that the active voice is the sentence structured in a way that the subject or 
the doer of the action is clearly mentioned.
As for the complement, it may be: 
Now, let’s look at a sentence to better understand it:
Complement: (Object Of The Verb + Adverb Of Place + Adverb Of Time)
Complemento: (objeto do verbo + advérbio de lugar + advérbio de tempo)
ACTIVE VOICE
Americans celebrate Valentine’s Day on February 14th.
 subject main verb object adverb of time 
 (Simple Present)
Os americanos celebram o Dia de São Valentim em 14 de fevereiro.
ACTIVE VOICE
As we’ve already seen, the basic structure of the active voice is subject + verb + complement.
Americans is the subject of the sentence, and it is followed by the verb celebrate, which is in the simple 
present; in the complement, we have the object of the verb. This is very important, because a sentence can 
only be turned into the passive voice if it has a subject and an object. 
Sometimes the complement will have an adverb of place, which shows where the action happened, or an 
adverb of time, which shows when the action happened.
Subject + Verb + Complement
Sujeito + Verbo + Complemento
ACTIVE VOICE
Now that we understand what the passive voice is used for, let’s see how it is 
built. To do so, we must start with the structure of the active voice. Look:
181
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
So, the object of the verb in the active voice becomes the subject in the passive voice. 
Then we add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb in the active voice. The main verb in 
the active voice is celebrate, conjugated in the simple present; so, we conjugate the verb to be in the simple 
present as well. Here, it will be is.
The next step is to change the main verb in the active voice to the past participle. If it is a regular verb, it 
will have the same form as the simple past. But if it is an irregular verb, it will depend on the verb. Celebrate 
is regular, so it becomes celebrated.
Finally, we place the adverb of time, on February 14th. The sentence may f inish there.
Someone trained the salespeople to help you. 
Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.
ACTIVE VOICE 
Americans celebrate Valentine’s Day on February 14th.
 subject main verb object adverb of time
 (Simple Present)
Os americanos celebram o Dia de São Valentim em 14 de fevereiro.
Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th (by the Americans).
 subject be main verb adverb of time agent of the passive
 (Past Participle)
O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro (pelos americanos).
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Bear in mind that this structure may vary a little. This is just an example of the basic structure 
to form many sentences in the active voice in English. 
Now let’s see what happens when we turn this sentence into the passive voice. Check it out:
If you want, you can add the agent of the passive, which is the subject in the 
active voice, introduced by the preposition by, in this case, by the Americans. 
But, remember, this is optional information. 
Let’s see other examples with the main verb in other verb forms. Look:
182
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The object in the active voice becomes the subject, so we have The salespeople. 
Then we add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb. In this case, 
trained is in the simple past. So, the verb to be becomes were, because The 
salespeople is equivalent to they. 
The next step is to change the main verb to the past participle, trained. And the 
rest is the complement.
Another example:
The stores will offer many kinds of sales. 
As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoção. 
ACTIVE VOICE 
Knowing who trained the salespeople doesn’t make a difference. 
What does matter is that they are trained. So, we will use the 
passive voice. Let’s turn this sentence now. Check it out:
Someone trained the salespeople to help you.
 subject main verb object 
 (Simple Past)
Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
The salespeople were trained to help you.
 subject to be main verb
 (Past Participle)
Os vendedores foram treinados para ajudar você.
183
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
The stores are warning the customers to mind their belongings at all times.
 subject main verb object
 (Present Continuous)
As lojas estão avisando aos clientes para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
The object in the active voice becomes the subject, so we have Many kinds of sales.
Then we must add the verb to be in the same verb form as the main verb. The main verb in 
this case is offer, and it is in the future with will; so, the verb to be has to be conjugated in the 
future: will be.
Next, we change the main verb, offer, to the past participle, offered. The agent of the 
passive, the stores, is optional. We will include it whenever it is important to mention who is 
performing the action.
Look at this next one now:
Again, it is not important to know who will offer many kinds of 
sales. So, let’s use the passive voice:
The stores will offer many kinds of sales.
 subject main verb object
 (Will)
As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoções.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Customers are being warned to mind their belongings at all times.
 subject to be main verb
 (Past Perfect)
Os clientes estão sendo avisados para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.
Many kinds of sales will be offered (by the stores).
 subject to be main verb agent of the passive
 (Past Perfect)
Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos (pelas lojas).
184
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary Grammar ActivitiesGrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
In this chapter, we’ve seen the imperative, the passive voice, and verbs 
in the past participle. If you want to learn more about these topics, 
look at the Grammar Guide section at the end of your book.
GRAMMAR GUIDE 
ImperativePage 204 w
Irregular Verbs – Past Participle Page 215 w
Passive Voice Page 236 w
The subject now will be international warranty, followed by might not be, since 
the main verb in the active voice is might not offer. Then we add the main verb 
in the past participle, offered.
Customers, which is the object of the verb in the active voice, becomes the subject of the 
passive voice.
Then we use the verb to be in the present continuous because the main verb in the active 
voice, warn, is in the present continuous. But the verb to be is used twice in this case: f irst, as 
the auxiliary verb in the present, is; second, as the main verb in the -ING form, being.
Next, the main verb of the active voice in the past participle, warned.
One last example: 
The manufacturer might not offer international warranty. 
 subject main verb object
 (might)
O fabricante pode não oferecer garantia internacional.
International warranty might not be offered by the manufacturer.
 subject to be main verb agent of the passive
 (Past Perfect)
A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
185
< voltar para o índice
185
< voltar para o índice
Grammar ActivitiesChapter 9 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script
Part 5.
Activities
A. Write AV if the sentence is in the active voice, and PV if it’s in the passive voice.
a) Valentine’s Day is celebrated on February 14th. ( )
 O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro 
b) Someone trained the salespeople to help you. ( )
 Alguém treinou os vendedores para te ajudar.
c) The stores will offer many kinds of sales. ( )
 As lojas vão oferecer muitos tipos de promoção. 
d) Many kinds of sales will be offered (by the stores). ( )
 Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos (pelas lojas).
e) The stores are warning the customers to mind their belongings at all times. ( )
 As lojas estão avisando aos clientes para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo. 
f) International warranty might not be offered by the manufacturer. ( )
 A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.
a) to check the delivery address. 
 Não se esqueça de verif icar o endereço de entrega. 
b) Valentine’s Day on February 14th by the Americans. 
 O Dia de São Valentim é celebrado em 14 de fevereiro pelos americanos. 
c) The salespeople to help you.
 Os vendedores foram treinados para ajudar você.
d) Many kinds of sales (by the stores). 
 Muitos tipos de promoção serão oferecidos (pelas lojas).
B. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate word(s) according to the translation.
186
< voltar para o índice
Chapter 9 Vocabulary GrammarVocabulary ActivitiesVideo Script Grammar Activities
Activity A – Answers
a. PV 
b. AV
c. AV 
d. PV
e. AV
f. PV
Activity B – Answers
a. Do not (Don’t) forget
b. is celebrated
c. were trained
d. will be offered
e. are being warned 
f. might not be offered / may not be offered
e) Customers to mind their belongings at all times.
 Os clientes estão sendo avisados para cuidarem dos seus pertences o tempo todo.
f) International warranty by the manufacturer.
 A garantia internacional pode não ser oferecida pelo fabricante.
187
< voltar para o índice
Grammar Guide.
Adverbs are words used to modify a verb, an adjective, another adverb, phrases, 
or sentences. They answer questions such as where, when, for how long, how 
likely, or to what degree, and are classif ied as adverbs of manner, place, time, 
frequency, certainty, and degree. 
Adverbs of frequency are the ones used to express how often we do things. 
Take a look at the most common ones.
Always
Sempre
Usually/Typically
Geralmente
Often 
Frequentemente 
Sometimes
Às vezes / Algumas vezes
Hardly / Hardly ever
Dificilmente / Quase nunca
Never
Nunca
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Commonly used
100% 
0% 
189
< voltar para o índice
Adverbs of Frequency
However, there are exceptions to the general rule. When the verb 
to be is the main verb in the simple present or the simple past, the 
adverb is placed after the verb to be. 
Pay attention to this. When the verb to be is an auxiliary verb, the position follows 
the general rule and the adverb is placed before the main verb.
Regarding the structure, the general rule is that the adverb comes before the main verb.
Do you usually go to the gym in the morning?
Você geralmente vai à academia de manhã?
(The adverb “usually” is placed before the main verb “go.”)
You can’t always get what you want.
Você nem sempre consegue o que deseja.
(The adverb “always” is placed before the main verb “get.”)
She is always on time.
Ela é sempre pontual.
(Verb to be = main verb; The adverb “always” is placed after it).
I am always looking for discounts.
Eu estou sempre procurando descontos.
(Verb to be = auxiliary verb; Main verb = “looking”; The adverb “always” is 
placed before the main verb.)
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Position of the Adverb – General Rule
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Main Verb
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Auxiliary Verb
190
< voltar para o índice
Besides the most common adverbs we’ve seen, there are some that express a definite frequency and 
are most of the time placed at the end of the sentence. These adverbs usually bring us information about 
scheduled and planned events.
An adverbial phrase expressing 
frequency can also be used to tell 
us how often something happens. 
An adverbial phrase is a group of 
words that function as an adverb 
in a sentence. They are used to add 
meaning to a verb, an adjective, or 
another adverb. 
We have exams monthly.
Nós fazemos provas mensalmente.
(It means that every month we have exams.)
I check the stock market daily.
Eu verif ico o mercado de ações diariamente.
(I check the stock market every day.)
The system is updated hourly.
O sistema é atualizado a cada hora.
(The system is updated every hour.)
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Definite Frequency
Another exception is the adverb sometimes. This adverb can be placed before the subject, 
before the main verb, or after the main verb.
Sometimes we hike. / We sometimes hike. / We hike sometimes.
Às vezes caminhamos. / Nós às vezes caminhamos. / Nós caminhamos às vezes.
(The adverb “sometimes” can go before the subject, before the main verb, 
or after the main verb.)
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Position of the Adverb – Verb to be: Auxiliary Verb
Once a day
Uma vez por dia
Three times a month
Três vezes por mês
Twice a week
Duas vezes por semana
Ten times a year
Dez vezes por ano
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY
Definite Frequency
191
< voltar para o índice
Check the use of adverbial phrases in the context. In terms of structure, notice that the 
words combined are phrases because they form a unit that has a particular function in the 
sentence. These phrases refer to the verbs to show us how often things happen. As they add 
information to verbs, they are called adverbial phrases of frequency. 
Some expressions are also used tell us how often things happen.
Sandra has Pilates classes three times a week.
A Sandra tem aula de pilates três vezes na semana.
(Sandra has Pilates classes three days in a week.)
Once in a blue moon, I wash my car.
Uma vez ou outra, eu lavo o meu carro.
(“Once in a blue moon” means that something is rare, so, I rarely wash my car.)
I take a vacation twice a year.
Eu tiro férias duas vezes por ano.
(It means that I have two vacation periods per year.)
Every now and then we visit our friends.
De vez em quando nós visitamos nossos amigos.
(“Every now and then” means that it is not all the time, but it is not rareeither).
ADVERBIAL PHRASES OF FREQUENCY
EXPRESSIONS
Now you know what an adverb is, as well as when and how we use adverbs of frequency and 
adverbial phrases to say how often we do things or how often things happen. 
192
< voltar para o índice
The structure be + going to is often used to refer to the future.
When the structure be + going to refers to the future, the verb to be is used in 
the simple present followed by going to and a verb in its base form.
BE + GOING TO: FUTURE
Be (Simple Present) + Going to + Verb (Base Form)
I’m going to travel next week.
Eu vou viajar semana que vem.
We use be + going to when we want to talk about future events or actions that were planned 
beforehand. That is, when we use this structure, we may want to emphasize the fact that we 
have been planning this future event.
BE + GOING TO
We are going to buy a new house.
Nós vamos comprar uma casa nova.
(The people who made this decision had to reach an agreement to decide 
when, why, and how to do that.)
I am going to Mexico on my next vacation.
Eu estou indo para o México nas minhas próximas férias.
(I had to decide the destination, choose the dates, book a f light, a hotel, a car, etc.)
193
< voltar para o índice
Be + 
Going To (Future)
Be + going to is also used to talk about predictions based on evidence. That is, according to 
the speaker’s point of view, there’s evidence that this future event is going to happen.
BE + GOING TO
It’s really cloudy. It is going to rain.
Está muito nublado. Vai chover.
(The cloudy sky is an evidence.)
It’s the second time you arrive late. You are going to get into serious trouble.
É a segunda vez que você chega atrasado. Você vai ter sérios problemas.
(From the speaker’s knowledge of the facts, arriving late again is 
evidence that you are getting into trouble.)
Another use of be + going to is to insist that people do or do not things. This is a 
way to add emphasis to the fact that something is obligatory. Check some examples.
BE + GOING TO
You are going to wash your hand before you sit at the table.
Você vai lavar a mão antes de se sentar à mesa.
(You are telling what the person has to do, emphasizing the person has to 
wash their hands f irst).
You are not going to play until you finish your homework.
Você não vai brincar até terminar a sua lição de casa.
(You are saying what is not going to happen—play—if something isn’t done 
before—the homework.)
In informal speech, you can replace going to with gonna.
BE + GOING TO
I’m gonna talk to her.
Eu vou falar com ela.
(gonna = going to)
194
< voltar para o índice
Now, analyze the use of will and be + going to when referring to the future. 
Mostly, you can use them interchangeably. The differences in use may be very 
subtle and have a lot to do with the speaker’s intention. That happens because 
choosing between will or be + going to depends on the speaker’s perspective 
and interpretation of that future event. In some contexts, one structure might 
sound more natural than the other. 
WILL VS. BE + GOING TO
Julia, will you marry me?
Julia, você quer se casar comigo?
There are some reasons why asking this question with will sounds more natural 
and more appropriate than with going to.
WILL VS. BE + GOING TO
First, the modal verb will convey an idea of willingness, that is, something 
you want to do or want it to happen. 
Primeiro, o modal verb will traz uma ideia de vontade, ou seja, algo que você 
quer fazer ou quer que aconteça.
Second, John expects Julia to make an instant decision. That is, John may 
have planned to propose to Julia, but Julia is listening to that for the first 
time, and she’s expected to make a decision about that future event at the 
moment of the conversation.
Segundo, o John espera que a Julia tome uma decisão imediata. Ou seja, o 
John pode ter planejado pedir a Julia em casamento, mas a Julia está ouvindo 
a proposta pela primeira vez, e espera-se que ela tome uma decisão sobre 
esse evento futuro no momento da conversa.
Imagine this situation. There is a man named John 
who decides to propose to his girlfriend, Julia. In this 
case, will is preferred. 
195
< voltar para o índice
Now imagine that Julia accepts John’s proposal. They schedule a date 
and start to plan the wedding. Julia goes to a bridal shop to choose the 
dress and the salesperson may ask her about the wedding. 
In this situation, be + going to sounds more natural and even more 
appropriate since Julia and John have been planning this future 
event beforehand.
WILL VS. BE + GOING TO
Salesperson: When is the wedding?
Vendedor: Quando é o casamento?
Now you know more about the structure be + going to, its uses, and some 
differences between will and be + going to.
Julia: It’s going to be in June.
Julia: Vai ser em junho.
196
< voltar para o índice
Conditionals are sentences that talk about known facts or hypothetical 
situations and their consequences. In these sentences, something must happen 
f irst so that another thing happens. Conditionals usually contain an if-clause, 
which is the conditional clause, and another cause stating the consequence.
When the clause that gives us one condition, that is, the if-clause, comes f irst, we 
place a comma right after it. But the if-clause can also come after the main clause; 
then, there is no comma.
There are four types of conditional sentences. Each type of conditional expresses 
a degree of probability for a situation to happen. We call them zero conditional, 
first conditional, second conditional, and third conditional. 
Zero conditionals are used to talk about general truths, which means one thing 
will always cause a specif ic consequence. The verb form used in both clauses is 
the simple present.
If I had money, I would travel the world.
Se eu tivesse dinheiro, eu viajaria pelo mundo.
(The condition is “If I had money” and the 
consequence is “I would travel the world.”)
(A condição é “Se eu tivesse dinheiro”, e a 
consequência é “eu viajaria pelo mundo”.)
I’ll go to the beach tomorrow if the weather is good.
Eu irei à praia amanhã se o tempo estiver bom.
(The consequence is “I’ll go to the beach tomorrow” 
and the condition is “if the weather is good.”)
(A consequência é “Eu irei à praia amanhã”, 
e a condição é “se o tempo estiver bom”.)
CONDITIONALS
197
< voltar para o índice
Conditionals
The first conditional is used when the result is likely to happen. In this conditional, we use the if-clause in 
the simple present and the main clause with will or another modal verb used to express future ideas.
If Clause
If (When) + Simple Present
If-clause
If + Present
If you cool water to zero degrees, it turns into ice.
Se você resfriar a água a zero grau, ela vira gelo.
(It is a scientif ic fact; so, the result of the conditional clause will always be true.)
(É um fato científ ico; portanto, o resultado da oração condicional será sempre 
verdadeiro.)
When you smoke, you harm your health.
Quando você fuma, você prejudica a sua saúde.
(This consequence is also true, regardless of the circumstances.)
(Essa consequência também é verdadeira, independente das circunstâncias.)
If you study, you will do well on the exam.
Se você estudar, você se sairá bem na prova.
(A future situation we believe to be possible).
If you study, you may do well on the exam.
Se você estudar, você pode se sair bem na prova.
Se você estudar, pode ser que se saia bem na prova.
(You are likely to reach the outcome).
If you go on a diet, you’ll lose weight.
Se você f izer uma dieta, perderá peso.
(A future situation we believe to be possible).
If you go on a diet, you can lose weight.
Se você f izer uma dieta, você pode perder peso.
(If you fulf il the condition, it’s a possible future). 
Main Clause
Simple Present
Main Clause
Will/May/Can/Could/Should + Infinitive
ZERO CONDITIONAL
General Truths
FIRST CONDITIONAL
Likely future results
198
< voltar para o índice
The second conditionals is used to talk about unrealistic consequencesor things that are not 
likely to happen. For this conditional, we use the If-clause in the simple past and the main clause 
frequently with the modal verb would. The main sentence expresses the unlikelihood that the 
result will actually happen, so the modal verbs could and might are also used.
The third conditional is used to say that if something had happened in the past, the present 
would be different. These sentences express a condition that was likely to happen, but it 
didn’t, and it might imply an idea of regret.
In this conditional, the if-clause is in the past perfect and the main clause is formed by a 
modal verb that expresses past probability or hypothetical situations in the past, such as 
could, should, and would + have + the main verb in the past participle.
If-clause
If + Past
If-clause
If + Past Perfect
If I had a billion dollars, I would go to Mars.
If I had a billion dollars, I could go to Mars.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu iria para Marte.
Se eu tivesse um bilhão de dólares, eu poderia ir para Marte.
If I were you, I would call her.
Se eu fosse você, eu ligaria para ela.
If you had told me you needed help, I could have helped you.
Se você tivesse me dito que precisava de ajuda, eu poderia ter lhe ajudado.
If you had left home earlier, you would have arrived on time.
Se você tivesse saído de casa mais cedo, teria chegado no horário.
Main Clause
Would/Could/Might + Infinitive
Main Clause
Modal + Perfect
SECOND CONDITIONAL
Unrealistic Consequence
THIRD CONDITIONAL
A condition that was likely to happen, but didn’t
Now you know what a conditional is and the most common types of 
conditionals as well as the structures and use.
199
< voltar para o índice
Contractions are shorter forms of a word, syllable, or word group. They are very 
common in spoken language and informal writing.
In English, two of the most frequent contractions are with the verbs to be and to 
have in the present with subject pronouns.
It’s important to pay special attention to the contraction of these verbs in the third 
person singular—he, she and it. They have the same contracted form, and only the 
context is going to make clear whether ’s stands for the contraction of the verb to be 
or the verb to have.
The verb to be in the present can be contracted with pronouns or nouns either 
when it’s the main verb of a sentence or the auxiliary.
Verb to be
I’m
(I + am)
You’re/We’re/They’re
(You + are / We + are / They + are)
He’s/She’s/It’s
(He + is / She + is / It + is)
Verb to have
I’ve
(I + Have)
You’ve /We’ve/They’ve
(You + have / We + have / They + have)
He’s/She’s/It’s
(He + has / She + has / It + has)
CONTRACTIONS OF VERBS
Present
200
< voltar para o índice
Contraction of Verbs
CONTRACTIONS
Nouns/Pronouns + Verb To Be (in the present)
CONTRACTIONS
Nouns/Pronouns + Auxiliary Verbs
Verb To Be as the Main Verb
I’m happy for you.
Estou feliz por você.
(I’m = Pronoun + Verb To Be)
Sheila’s here.
Sheila está aqui.
(Sheila’s = Noun + Verb To Be)
I’ve told you.
Eu te disse.
(I’ve = Pronoun + Verb To Have)
The verb “to have” functions as an auxiliary.
O verbo to have funciona como um verbo auxiliar.
Verb To Be as the Auxiliary Verb
I’m going to tell mom the good news.
Eu vou contar para a mamãe as boas notícias.
(I’m = Pronoun + Verb To Be)
She’s staying at the Central Hotel.
Ela está hospedada no Central Hotel.
(She’s = Pronoun + Verb To Be)
We’ll be happy to see you.
Nós f icaremos felizes em vê-lo.
(we’ll = Pronoun + Modal Verb Will)
The modal verb “will” functions as an auxiliary.
O modal verb will funciona como um verbo auxiliar.
For all other verbs that are not the verb to be in the present, the pronouns and 
nouns will only be contracted with auxiliary verbs.
Once again, two different verbs will have the same contracted form—the verb 
to have as an auxiliary verb in its past form had and the modal verb would. Both 
verbs are contracted as ’d. 
201
< voltar para o índice
In negative statements, auxiliary verbs can also be contracted with the negative 
particle not.
Basically, all auxiliary verbs in English can contract with not; the only exception is the 
f irst person singular of the verb to be in the simple present, am, which does not.
Auxiliary Verbs
 isn’t is + not
 aren’t are + not
 wasn’t was + not
 weren’t were + not
 don’t do + not
 doesn’t does + not
 didn’t did + not
 haven’t have + not
 hasn’t has + not
 hadn’t had + not
Modal Auxiliaries
 won’t will + not
 can’t can + not
 couldn’t could + not
 shouldn’t should + not
 mustn’t must + not
 wouldn’t would + not
 won’t will + not
CONTRACTIONS
Auxiliaries in negative sentences
I’d like to talk to you.
Eu gostaria de conversar com você.
(I’d = Pronoun + Modal Verb Would)
The modal verb “would” functions as an auxiliary.
O modal verb would funciona como um verbo auxiliar.
I’d already talked to you about it.
Eu já tinha falado com você sobre isso.
(I’d = Pronoun + Verb To Have in the Past “had”)
The verb “to have” functions as an auxiliary in its past form.
O verbo to have tem a função de um verbo auxiliar na sua forma passada.
202
< voltar para o índice
Besides contracting with nouns, pronouns, and the negative particle 
not, the short form ’s (= is) can also be contracted with question 
words and the adverbs here and there, as we can see in the following 
examples.
There are some special cases with the verbs to go, to want, and to get. Some forms of these verbs can 
contract with the preposition to. It is mostly a feature of spoken language, and it is considered very informal. 
What’s up?
E aí?
(The question word “what” + the verb “is” = What’s)
Here’s your document.
Aqui está o seu documento.
(Here + the verb “is” = Here’s)
There’s a problem.
Há um problema.
(There + the verb “is” = There’s)
CONTRACTIONS
Questions Words / Here / There
CONTRACTIONS OF VERBS
Other Verbs – Special Cases
Going + to = Gonna
I’m gonna talk to her.
I’m going to talk to her.
Eu vou falar com ela.
Want + to = Wanna
I wanna be rich.
I want to be rich.
Eu quero ser rico.
Got + to = Gotta
You gotta believe me.
You (have) got to believe me.
Você tem que acreditar em mim.
Now you know a bit more about contractions of verbs.
203
< voltar para o índice
The imperative form is used to tell people what to do and for this reason it does not have an 
interrogative form. The Imperative is only used in the affirmative and negative forms. 
In English, the imperative performs many functions. It can be used to give orders 
or to demand something, to instruct, to give advice or recommendation, or to 
encourage someone. 
Affirmative Form
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement
Go there.
Vá lá.
Negative Form
Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement
Don’t come here.
Não venha aqui.
IMPERATIVE FORM
Structure
IMPERATIVE FORM
Functions
1. Order; demand
 Open your book. Don’t get in.
 Abra o seu livro. Não entre.
2. Instructions
 Mix the ingredients and add salt. Don’t put too much salt.
 Misture os ingredientes e adicione sal. Não coloque muito sal.
204
< voltar para o índice
Imperative
3. Advice, suggestions
 Have a cup of tea and rest. Don’t forget to take your coat.
Tome uma xícara de chá e descanse. Não se esqueça de levar seu casaco.
4. Requests; favors
 Bring it to me, please. Don’t tell John, please.
 Traga isso para mim, por favor. Não conte para o John, por favor.
5. Encouragement
 Try again! You can do it. Don’t give up. You can do it.
 Tente novamente! Você consegue. Não desista. Você consegue.
Imperative sentences are always addressed to the listener or listeners. So, the subject is always 
in the second person, which is “you,” in the singular or plural forms. For that reason, in most 
imperative sentences, the subject is omitted. 
However, the subject can be included in imperative sentences to add emphasis to the action. In 
such cases, it will be placed before the main verb, in bothaff irmative and negative sentences.
Affirmative Form
Subject (second person) + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement
You sit down now.
Sente-se agora.
Negative Form
Auxiliary Verb Do + Not (Don’t) + Subject (second person) + 
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement
Don’t you lie to me.
Não minta para mim.
IMPERATIVE FORM
Using the Subject to Add Emphasis 
205
< voltar para o índice
In English, we can only use the imperative form to address the person or people to whom we are talking. 
But if we want to make suggestions or requests in the first person, we can use the verb let in the imperative.
We’ll use the verb let in the imperative form, the object pronoun for the first person, which is either “me” 
or “us,” a verb in the infinitive form (without to), and the complement.
Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the First Person (me/us) + 
Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)
Let me see.
Deixe-me ver.
Let me help you.
Deixe-me ajudá-lo.
Let’s meet tomorrow. (Let’s Let us)
Vamos nos encontrar amanhã.
Let’s watch a movie tonight. (Let’s Let us)
Vamos assistir a um filme hoje à noite.
INDEFINITE ARTICLE
Making Suggestions or Requests in the First Person
We can use the same structure to make suggestions or requests for a third person. 
To do that, we just have to use the object pronouns in the third person.
Let (Imperative Form) + Object Pronoun in the Third Person (him/her/it/them) + 
Verb in the Infinitive Form (without “to”)
Let it go.
Deixe isso para lá.
Let him stay.
Deixe-o f icar.
Let them talk.
Deixe-os falar.
IMPERATIVE FORM
Making Suggestions or Requests for a Third Person
And this is how we use the imperative in English.
206
< voltar para o índice
Pronouns are words that can take the place of a noun, a noun phrase, and noun clauses. 
They can have different uses: a specif ic use, and a more generic use.
When pronouns are specif ic, we know exactly to whom or what they are referring. As for the 
generic use of pronouns, we cannot specify to whom or to what they are referring. 
PRONOUNS
Specific
Refer to definite people, things, or places.
Se referem a pessoas, coisas ou lugares definidos.
Generic / Non-specific
Do not refer to a specific person, thing, or place. They are either generic or indefinite.
Não se referem a uma pessoa, coisa ou lugar específ icos. Eles são genéricos ou indefinidos.
The pronoun it, for example, may refer to a specific thing, animal, or place, but it can also have a 
non-specific use when it does not refer to a person, or thing, or to any other part of the sentence. 
In such cases, the pronoun it is often referred to as impersonal. Check some examples.
PRONOUN – IT
Specific and Generic Uses 
Specific
This purse is beautiful. Too bad it is too expensive.
Essa bolsa é linda. Pena que é muito cara.
(it = this purse)
Look at this fish. It changes color.
Olhe para esse peixe. Ele muda de cor.
(It = this f ish)
207
< voltar para o índice
Impersonal And 
Indefinite Pronouns
Non-specific
It’s good to see you!
É bom te ver!
(It accomplishes the function of the subject of the sentence. 
It does not refer to a person or thing.)
It’s a pleasure to meet you.
É um prazer conhecê-lo.
(It makes no reference to a person, thing, or to any part of the sentence.)
Other pronouns such as you, they, he, or she can also have generic uses when 
they refer to people in general. Check some examples so you can understand 
it better.
PRONOUNS – HE, SHE, AND THEY
Specific and Generic Uses 
Specific
If John wants to arrive on time, he should leave now.
Se o John quiser chegar a tempo, ele deveria sair agora.
(He replaces John. It has a definite and specif ic function.)
Generic
If a student wants to pass the exam, he has to study.
Se um aluno quer passar na prova, ele tem que estudar.
(He refers to a student in a generic way.)
If a student wants to pass the exam, he or she has to study.
Se um aluno/a quer passar na prova, ele ou ela tem que estudar.
(It’s a generic statement, and it avoids using just the 
masculine pronoun to refer to both genders.)
If a person wants to pass the exam, they have to study.
Se uma pessoa quer passar na prova, ele/ela tem que estudar.
(This is the singular they. In this generic use, they replaces 
he or she, and it refers to a person.)
208
< voltar para o índice
The second person pronoun, you, can also be used in a generic way. But we’ll have to analyze 
the context in order to distinguish how it is being used.
PRONOUN – YOU
Specific and Generic Uses 
Specific
Mark, you haven’t been studying hard enough. If you want to pass, you must study.
Mark, você não tem estudado o bastante. Se você quer passar, tem que estudar.
(you = Mark)
Non-specific
Everyone knows that graduating from college takes time and effort. 
If you want to pass, you must study.
Todo mundo sabe que para se formar na faculdade é preciso tempo e esforço. 
Se você quer passar, tem que estudar.
(you = anyone who wants to pass)
To refer to the singular, we can also use the pronoun one. One is used to talk 
about people in general, and it can be replaced by the pronoun you with generic 
meaning.
GENERIC USES OF PRONOUNS 
One cannot learn a language without practicing.
Não se pode aprender um idioma sem praticar.
(One = a person).
You cannot learn a language without practicing.
Você não pode aprender um idioma sem praticar.
(You = people in general).
209
< voltar para o índice
There is a group of pronouns, indefinite pronouns, that will always be used 
in place of a noun without specifying a particular person or thing that is being 
represented. These pronouns are always used to refer to people, places, and 
things in a general way.
If we want to refer to a group of people, we can use some variations ending 
in -ONE, such as everyone, someone, anyone, or no one, or with the same 
meaning, using the suffix -BODY. They all refer to people.
We’ll use the suff ix -THING, if we want to refer to things in general, be them 
concrete or abstract.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
People
Nobody / No one
Ninguém
Somebody/Someone
Alguém
Anybody/Anyone
Qualquer pessoa
Everybody/Everyone
Todo mundo
Things
Nothing
 Nada
Something
 Alguma coisa
 Anything
 Qualquer coisa
 Everything
Tudo
Check some examples of the use of indefinite pronouns. 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
No one should ever die of starvation.
Nobody should ever die of starvation
Ninguém deveria morrer de fome.
(No one / Nobody = Not even one person)
I’ve never met anyone as kind as you.
I’ve never met anybody as kind as you.
Eu nunca conheci alguém / 
uma pessoa tão gentil quanto você.
(Anyone/Anybody = one person, 
two or more people)
Can someone tell me the truth?
Can somebody tell me the truth?
Alguém pode me dizer a verdade?
(Someone/Somebody = an unspecif ied 
person, some person)
Everyone was excited about the game.
Everybody was excited about the game.
Todos f icaram entusiasmados com o jogo.
(Everyone/Everybody = every individual)
210
< voltar para o índice
And this how you use pronouns in specific and generic ways.
It’s important to notice, though, that these pronouns usually refer to a group 
of people or things—or, in their negative forms, to the absence of a group 
of people or things—, but they will always require a verb in the third person 
singular. 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
Everybody loves Mary.
Todo mundo ama a Mary.
(The verb to love is used in the third person singular, loves.)
Thank you for dinner. Everything was delicious.
Obrigado pelo jantar. Tudo estava delicioso.
(Everything means all the dishes. But the verb to be 
 is used in the third person singular, was.)
Everybody is happy. They are singing, laughing, and dancing.
Todo mundo está feliz. Eles estão cantando, rindo e dançando
(Everybody means all the people. But the verb to be is used 
in the third person singular, is.)
211
< voltar para o índice
Irregular verbs are those that do not follow the rule for regular verbs. These 
verbs have different forms in thepast that do not follow specif ic spelling rules. 
Some will have a different ending, some will have a vowel change, some will 
become totally different from their base form, and some won’t change at all.
The verb to read has no change in spelling. However, the pronunciation of the 
central vowel will be different. 
Another group of irregular verbs will change the stressed vowel in their past forms.
To cut (cut)
cortar
To begin (began)
começar
To come (came)
vir
To give (gave)
dar
To know (knew)
saber, conhecer
To run (ran)
correr
To see (saw)
ver
To hurt (hurt)
machucar
To let (let)
deixar, permitir
To put (put)
botar, colocar
IRREGULAR VERBS
No Change
REGULAR VERBS
Change the Stressed Vowel
212
< voltar para o índice
Irregular Verbs Past
To break (broke)
quebrar
To have (had)
ter
To take (took)
levar, tomar
To drive (drove)
dirigir
To understand (understood)
entender, compreender
To bring (brought)
trazer
To make (made)
fazer
To tell (told)
contar, dizer
To get (got)
pegar, conseguir
To win (won)
ganhar
To buy (bought)
comprar
To say (said)
falar, dizer
To think (thought)
pensar, achar
To speak (spoke)
falar
To write (wrote)
escrever
IRREGULAR VERBS
Change the Stressed Vowel to “O” or “OU”
IRREGULAR VERBS
Change to end in a “D” Sound
Still in the group of irregular verbs that undergo changes in the stressed vowel, there is a very 
large group of verbs that will change the vowels from the base form to the vowel o, which is 
sometimes spelled “ou.” In some verbs from this group this will be the only change. Others 
undergo some additional changes. 
Another group of irregular verbs will be altered in order to have the final syllable of their past 
forms sounding as a D. Among the most frequent verbs, we can highlight three.
These widely used verbs are: to have, in the past had, to make, in the past made, and to say, 
in the past said (in this case we dropped the -Y and added –ID). 
213
< voltar para o índice
There’s also a group that will vary to have the ending -T in the simple past.
In addition to the ending, another feature of this group of verbs is that the stressed vowel in the base form, 
pronounced as a long vowel, in the past becomes a short vowel. For example, the verb to feel. The stressed 
vowel has a long sound. But, in the past, it’s felt, which is a short vowel, and it ends in -T. 
Check out a group of verbs that undergo similar changes:
There are three very frequent verbs in English that do not f it any of the aforementioned groups, 
which are the verbs to be, to go, and to do. 
The verb to be is the most irregular verb in English. In the past, it is the only verb to have two 
different conjugations: was and were. Look at the conjugation table of the verb to be in the past.
To feel (felt)
sentir
To meet (met)
encontrar, conhecer
To keep (kept)
manter, permancer
To lose (lost)
perder
To leave (left)
sair, partir, deixar
To leave (left)
sair, partir, deixar
REGULAR VERBS
Change the Stressed Vowel
To do (did)
fazer
 Subject Pronoun Verb To Be (Simple Past)
 I/he/she/it was
 you/we/they were
To go (went)
ir
To be (was/were)
ser, estar 
IRREGULAR VERBS
No pattern
IRREGULAR VERBS
To Be (ser/estar)
And now you know some irregular verbs in the past.
214
< voltar para o índice
I’ve seen so many beautiful places. I couldn’t have chosen just one to write about.
Eu vi muitos lugares bonitos. Eu não poderia ter escolhido escrever sobre apenas um.
(seen = past participle of to see; chosen = past participle of to choose)
In this grammar guide, we’ll tackle irregular verbs in the past participle. It’s important to 
highlight that, among the most commonly used verbs in English, there are only about 200 
irregular verbs. That means that most of the verbs are regular.
But although there aren’t many irregular verbs in English, it’s fair to say that they deserve some 
special attention, since there is not a pattern that applies to all of them.
In English, the past participle is used with some perfect forms in the active voice, namely the 
present perfect, the past perfect, the future perfect, and modal verbs + perfect, and it is also 
used with all the verb forms in the passive voice.
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Perfect Forms
The tradition was kept by many people around the country.
A tradição foi mantida por muitas pessoas ao redor do país.
She was chosen as the employee of the month.
Ela foi escolhida a funcionária do mês.
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Passive Voice
Check some examples in the passive voice:
If you want to learn more about the perfect forms or the passive voice, check the grammar 
guides on these topics. They both use the past participle, and that’s why it’s important to focus 
on this topic.
215
< voltar para o índice
Irregular Verbs - 
Past Participle
The regular verbs in the past participle follow the same pattern of the past forms. 
As for the irregular verbs, some of them will keep the same form as the one used for 
the past, some of them will keep the base form—although they might differ from the 
past form—and others will have a totally different form.
In the f irst case, the verbs have the same form for the past and past participle 
grouped by phonological patterns.
The same rule applies for the verbs to mean, to read, and to hear, for example.
Base Form
Keep
Manter
Sleep
Dormir
Meet
Encontrar, conhecer
Past
Kept
Slept
Met
Past Participle
Kept
Slept
Met
Base Form
Mean
Signif icar
Read
Ler
Hear
Ouvir
Past
Meant
Read
Heard
Past Participle
Meant
Read
Heard
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past = Past Participle
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past = Past Participle
216
< voltar para o índice
Verbs ending in -ELL change to -OLD and keep the same form in the 
past and past participle. 
Base Form
Find
Encontrar, achar
Bring
Trazer
Think
Pensar, achar
Past
Found
Brought
Thought
Past Participle
Found
Brought
Thought
Base Form
Sell
Vender
Tell
Dizer, contar
Past
Sold
Told
Past Participle
Sold
Told
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past = Past Participle
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past = Past Participle
In the same group, we’ll f ind the verbs to f ind, to bring, and to think, which will have 
the same form in the past and in the past participle.
217
< voltar para o índice
Another group of verbs will undergo some changes in their past forms, but their past 
participle forms are spelled and pronounced just like their base forms. 
Base Form
Bet
Apostar
Cut
Cortar
Hurt
Machucar
Past
Bet
Cut
Hurt
Past Participle
Bet
Cut
Hurt
Base Form
Come
Vir
Run
Correr
Become
Tornar-se
Past
Came
Ran
Became
Past Participle
Come
Run
Become
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Keep the same form
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Base form = Past Participle
There is a group of verbs that do not change their base forms in the past. 
This group will also keep the same form in the past participle. 
218
< voltar para o índice
For some others, we’ll add -N or -EN to the base form to make the past participle, 
and they may change the pronunciation of the stressed vowel.
Base Form
Break
Quebrar
Choose
Escolher
Get
Pegar, conseguir
Past
Broke
Chose
Got
Past Participle
Broken
Chosen
Gotten
Base Form
Drive
Dirigir
Ride
Montar
Write
Escrever
Eat
Comer
Fall
Cair
Forbid
Proibir 
Past
Drove
Rode
Wrote
Ate
Fell
Forbade
Past Participle
Driven
Ridden
Written
Eaten
Fallen
Forbidden
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past Participle = Past + -N or -EN
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Base form = Past Participle
Moreover, there is a group of verbs that have three different forms. Check some examples grouped 
according to phonological patterns as we did with the f irst group.
To make the past participle of some verbs, we’ll repeat the same form of the past and add -N or -EN.
219
< voltar para o índice
And now you know the past participle of irregular verbs, when to use it, 
as well as how to useit in the active and passive voices.
The highly frequent verbs to be, to do, and to go also have different forms. 
Check it on the table.
Notice that there are two different past forms for the verb to be, but there 
is only one for the past participle, which is been.
Base Form
Grow
Crescer
Know
Saber, conhecer
Fly
Voar
Past
Grew
Knew
Flew
Past Participle
Grown
Known
Flown
Base Form
Be
Ser, estar
Do
Fazer
Go
Ir
Past
Was/Were
Did
Went
Past Participle
Been
Done
Gone
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Past (-EW) = Past Participle (-OWN)
PAST PARTICIPLE – IRREGULAR VERBS
Some verbs that end in -EW in the past, will have their endings changed 
to -OWN in the past participle.
220
< voltar para o índice
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning 
to the main verb. Modal verbs can express possibility, probability, ability, 
permission, assumption, obligation, or prohibition.
The sentence structure of modal verbs follows the same pattern: 
MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure
Affirmative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Negative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Interrogative Form
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
221
< voltar para o índice
Modal Verb May
It may rain.
Pode chover. / Pode ser que chova.
(There is a reasonable chance that it will rain).
I may go to the party.
Eu posso ir à festa. / Pode ser que eu vá à festa.
(There is a reasonable chance that I will go to the party).
She may be at home.
Ela pode estar em casa. / Pode ser que ela esteja em casa.
(There is a reasonable chance that she will be home).
I may not be the best student in class, but I’m very dedicated.
Eu posso não ser o melhor aluno da turma, mas eu sou muito dedicado.
Be careful with the pieces of news you read on social media. They may not be true.
Tenha cuidado com notícias que você lê nas redes sociais. Elas podem não ser verdadeiras.
Researchers may not be able to find the cure to some diseases, 
but they’ve been doing their best.
Pesquisadores podem (até) não ser capazes de achar a cura para algumas doenças, 
mas eles têm dado o melhor de si.
MODAL VERB MAY
Expressing Probability
MODAL VERB MAY
Expressing Unlikely Things
The modal verb may can be used to express probability.
In such cases, we are saying that something is likely to happen, that there’s a 
chance that something will happen. For example: 
The modal verb may can also be used to say that there 
is a chance that something does not happen. 
In this case, we use it in the negative form. Take a look: 
222
< voltar para o índice
It is rare to see may in the interrogative form to give the idea of probability. 
The interrogative form is used as a formal way to ask for permission. In such 
cases, may is used in questions in the first person, either singular or plural.
When we ask for permission, the interrogative form can only be used in the first person. 
However, when we answer these permission requests, that is, when we give permission or not, we will use 
the aff irmative or the negative forms in the second person. Have a look: 
MODAL VERB MAY
Asking for Permission
MODAL VERB MAY
Giving Permission (or not)
Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?
Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
(May I come in? = First person singular – I).
May we talk to you for a minute, sir?
Nós podemos falar com senhor por um minuto?
(May we talk…? = First person plural – We).
Asking for permission: Excuse me, Ms. Sullivan. May I come in?
 Com licença, senhora Sullivan. Eu posso entrar?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may come in. / No, you may not come in.
 Sim, você pode entrar. / Não, você não pode entrar.
Asking for permission: May we talk to you for a minute, sir?
 Nós podemos falar com o senhor por um minuto?
Giving permission, or not: Yes, you may. / No, you may not.
 Sim, vocês podem. / Não, vocês não podem.
And now you know how to use the modal verb may. 
223
< voltar para o índice
Modal verbs, also known as modal auxiliary verbs, add meaning to the main 
verb. Modals can express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption, 
obligation, or prohibition. 
The modal verb might is mainly used to say that there’s a weak probability that 
something will happen, except in the interrogative form.
MODAL VERB
Structure
Affirmative
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb (Base Form) + 
Complement (if necessary)
We might go to Paris in the holiday season.
Pode ser que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
É possível que nós vamos para Paris na temporada de férias.
Há uma pequena chance de nós irmos para Paris na temporada de férias.
Negative
Subject + Modal Verb + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + 
Complement (if necessary)
I might not go to the party.
Pode ser que eu não vá à festa.
É possível que eu não vá à festa.
É pouco provável que eu vá à festa.
Interrogative
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb (Base Form) + 
Complement (if necessary)
Might I ask you a question?
Eu poderia fazer uma pergunta a você?
224
< voltar para o índice
Modal Verb Might
Questions with might are used when we want to ask for permission in formal contexts. 
But it is important to note that the modal verb may has this same function in the interrogative 
form, and it is usually preferred. 
Now, let’s see the uses of the modal verb might. 
Might can be used to express probability when we want to express that we believe 
something is not really likely to happen, so there’s a small chance, it’s a slight probability.
MODAL VERB – MIGHT 
Uses
I might be wrong, but I don’t think that’s a good decision.
Pode ser que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
É possível que eu esteja errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
Há uma pequena chance de eu estar errado, mas eu não acho essa uma boa decisão.
Kate might not be able to get to the meeting in time.
Pode ser que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É possível que a Kate não chegue a tempo na reunião.
É pouco provável que a Kate chegue a tempo na reunião.
We can also use might to make suggestions.
MODAL VERB – MIGHT
Uses
You might like this book I am reading.
Pode ser que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.
É possível que você goste desse livro que eu estou lendo.
You might want to try the gazpacho. It’s delicious.
Pode ser que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.
É possível que você queira experimentar o gaspacho. Está delicioso.
Now you know what a modal verb is, the structures you’ll use with them, and 
when and how to use the modal verb might. 
225
< voltar para o índice
Modal verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning 
to the main verb.
Modal verbs will follow the same sentence structure in the aff irmative, negative, 
and interrogative forms. Check the following table to see how it works:
MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure
Modal Verb Should
Affirmative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Negative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Interrogative Form
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
226
< voltar para o índice
You should clean your room.
Você deve limpar o seu quarto.
(It’s your responsibility).
People should respect other people’schoices.
As pessoas devem respeitar as escolhas de outras pessoas.
(It’s a social rule).
MODAL VERB SHOULD
Expressing Obligations and Duties
Depending on the context, sentences with the modal verb should can be understood 
as a polite way to talk about obligations and duties. Have a look at some examples: 
In some other cases, should expresses that something is probable because it is logical or normal, 
that is, you refer to a deduction. For instance: 
MODAL VERB SHOULD
Deductions
She left home half an hour ago. She should be arriving.
Ela saiu de casa meia hora atrás. Ela deve estar chegando.
(It’s a deduction based on the time she left her house and how far her home is from here)
The singer should launch her new album next month.
A cantora deve lançar o seu novo álbum mês que vem.
(Deduction based on behavior or clues).
You should check the airline policies before you pack.
Você deve verif icar as políticas da companhia aérea antes de fazer as malas.
You shouldn’t drink so much coffee.
Você não deve beber tanto café.
MODAL VERB SHOULD
Advice and Recommendation
The modal verb should has different uses. One of the most frequent is to give advice or 
recommendations. For example: 
227
< voltar para o índice
MODAL VERB SHOULD
Different Meanings Depending on the Context
You should get here before noon.
Você deve chegar aqui antes de meio-dia.
• It could be a piece of advice
• Poderia ser um conselho
• It could be your duty 
• Poderia ser sua obrigação
• It could be the speaker’s expectation
• Poderia ser uma expectativa do falante
And this is how you use the modal verb should. 
When talking about modals, the meaning we want to convey 
depends on the context. The same sentence may have different 
meanings. Compare: 
228
< voltar para o índice
Modal Verbs are also known as modal auxiliary verbs because they add meaning to the main 
verb. They express possibility, probability, ability, permission, assumption, obligation, or 
prohibition.
The structure of the modal verbs follows the same pattern. Check the following table.
In some cases, the modal verb would is used as a softer and less definitive form of the modal will, 
or as the past of will when we are reporting sentences.
Expressing hypothesis is one of the most common uses of the modal verb would. And since it is 
used to express hypothetical situations, you’ll see that it is used in many conditional sentences.
In such cases, we’ll use a clause with would to refer to unreal or uncertain situations together with 
an if-clause.
MODAL VERBS
Sentence Structure
Affirmative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Negative Form
Subject + Modal Verb + Not + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Sujeito + Modal Verb + Not + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
Interrogative Form
Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
Modal Verb + Sujeito + Verbo Principal na Forma Base + Complemento (se necessário)
229
< voltar para o índice
Modal Verb Would
We can also use would to make polite requests. If we observe it carefully, we’ll see that it’s still 
a request made from a hypothetical perspective, but now you are actually asking something 
from someone.
MODAL VERB WOULD
Polite Requests and Offers
If I had a lot of money, I would travel the world.
Se eu tivesse muito dinheiro, viajaria pelo mundo.
(I don’t have a lot of money. So, traveling the world is just a hypothetical situation.)
Would you invite your boss for your birthday?
Você convidaria o seu chefe para o seu aniversário?
(The question is asked out of curiosity. It’s a hypothetical situation.)
If I were you, I wouldn’t go the Caribbean now. It’s hurricane season.
Se eu fosse você, eu não iria para o Caribe agora. É temporada de furacão.
(It’s a hypothetical situation because I am not you, and I am not going to the Caribbean.)
MODAL VERB WOULD
Hypothesis
Polite Requests Polite Offers
Would you help me with my project? Would you like some coffee?
Você me ajudaria com o meu projeto? Você aceitaria um café?
Would you go to the grocery store for me? Would you like me to drive you home?
Você iria ao supermercado para mim? Você gostaria que eu te levasse para casa?
230
< voltar para o índice
And this is how you use the modal verb would. 
Would is also used to talk about a past habit or to express refusal in the past.
We can use would in expressions too. Would rather is used to say we prefer 
one thing to another. Most of the times, we use the contracted form, which is 
“I’d rather.”
Another commonly used expression with would is “would mind.” We use it to ask for favors or permission. 
But the structure is a bit different. Check it out in the following box. 
I asked her what was going on, but she wouldn’t tell me.
Perguntei o que estava acontecendo, mas ela não quis me dizer.
(I asked her in the past and she refused to tell me.)
When I was younger, I would argue with my brother all the time.
Quando eu era mais novo, eu discutia com meu irmão o tempo todo.
(It was a typical behavior in the past.)
I’d rather stay home tonight. I’m tired.
Eu prefiro f icar em casa hoje à noite. Estou cansado(a).
MODAL VERB WOULD
Talk about a past habit or express refusal in the past
MODAL VERB WOULD
Expressions – Would Rather
MODAL VERB WOULD
Expressions – Would Mind
Asking for a favor Asking for permission
Would you mind opening the window? Would you mind if I opened the window?
Você se importaria de abrir a janela? Você se importaria se eu abrisse a janela?
(Would you mind + verb in the -ING form) (Would you mind if + subject + verb in the past)
231
< voltar para o índice
There are two types of personal pronouns in English: personal pronouns used in the subject 
position, which, for that reason, are called subject pronouns, and personal pronouns used in the 
object position, which are called object pronouns. 
Check the following table to see the subject and object pronouns.
 Subject Pronouns Object Pronouns
 (Replace nouns as subjects) (Replace nouns as objects)
 I me
 eu me/mim
 
 you you
 tu/você te/ti/você/lhe
 he him
 ele ele/o/lhe
 she her
 ela ela/a/lhe
 it it
 ele/ela ele/ela/o/a/lhe
 we us
 nós nos/nós
 you you
 vós/vocês vos/vocês/lhes
 they them
 eles/elas eles/elas/os/as/lhes
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
Second person
singular
Second person
plural
Third person
plural
Third person
singular
First person
singular
First person
plural
232
< voltar para o índice
Object Pronouns
OBJECT PRONOUN
First Person Singular
OBJECT PRONOUN
First Person Plural
Tell me. What is your problem?
Conte-me. Qual é o seu problema?
Read this story to me, please!
Leia esta história para mim, por favor!
Do you want to talk to me?
Você quer falar comigo?
Tell us about your day.
Conte-nos sobre o seu dia.
Are they talking about us?
Eles estão falando sobre nós / a gente?
Do you want to go to the movies with us?
Você quer ir ao cinema conosco / com a gente?
Object pronouns are usually placed after the main verb of the sentence, since they 
function as the object of these verbs. They might not be placed immediately after the 
main verb, but they will always come after it. The only exception to this rule is when 
they are used in certain expressions such as both of us, all of them, none of you, 
etc. In such situations, they can be part of the subject of a sentence.
Let’s now take a closer look at each object pronoun.
Some languages present variations of the object pronouns used depending on the 
verb they are complementing. But that won’t happen in English.
The first-person pronouns used in the position of the object of the sentence will 
always be me for the singular and us for the plural. 
233
< voltar para o índice
I’ll help you.
Eu vou te ajudar. / Eu vou ajudar você. / Eu vou lheajudar. / 
Eu vou ajudar vocês/ Eu vou lhes ajudar.
I don’t understand you.
Eu não te entendo. / Eu não entendo você. / 
Eu não entendo vocês.
I’ll help you people / you all / you both.
Eu vou ajudar vocês / vocês todos / vocês dois.
OBJECT PRONOUN
Second Person Singular/Plural
OBJECT PRONOUN
Second Person Plural
For the second person, the personal 
pronoun used as the object pronoun is 
the same used as the subject pronoun: 
you. And it is used for both singular and 
plural. Therefore, the context tells us if 
you will be referring to singular or plural.
When we read these sentences, it’s not clear if we are using you to refer to one 
or to more people, that is, singular or plural. Especially because they are isolated 
sentences.
In spoken language, chances are the context will make it clear, since you is used 
to refer to the person or to the people you are talking to. Either way, you can make 
it clearer that you are using the plural form by combining you with other words, 
for example: you people, you all, or you both.
Mike’s son looks just like him.
O filho do Mike se parece muito com ele.
(The object pronoun him refers to “Mike,” a male noun, 
and it’s the object of the sentence.)
My sister is an amazing person. I love to talk to her.
Minha irmã é uma pessoa incrível. Eu adoro conversar com ela.
(We used the object pronoun her to replace the female noun “my sister.”)
OBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (Him/Her)
The third person singular object pronouns used for people are: him for masculine 
and her for feminine. Both are used mostly for people.
234
< voltar para o índice
I don’t understand this topic. I don’t understand it.
Eu não entendo este tópico. Eu não entendo (isto).
I love chocolate cake. I love it.
Eu adoro bolo de chocolate. Eu adoro (isso).
I’m watching this show. I’m watching it.
Estou assistindo a este programa. Estou assistindo (a isto).
I’m going to the beach with my friends. I’m going to the beach with them.
Estou indo à praia com meus amigos. Estou indo à praia com eles.
(The object is “my friends,” and it’s in the plural, so we could replace it with the object pronoun them.) 
I don’t know those people. I don’t know them.
Eu não conheço aquelas pessoas. Eu não as conheço. / Eu não conheço elas.
(To avoid repetition, we can replace the object “those people” for the object pronoun them.)
I like these shoes. I like them.
Eu gosto destes sapatos. Eu gosto deles.
(The object of the sentence is “these shoes.” To avoid repetition, we can use the object pronoun them.)
OBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)
OBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Plural (Them)
There’s still another third person singular object pronoun that is used for the other 
cases: the pronoun it. This personal pronoun will also have the same form when 
used as the subject or as the object pronoun.
In the third person plural, we’ll use they as the subject pronoun, and them as the object pronoun. In the 
plural, we will use the same pronoun to refer to people, places, objects, animals, or any other third person 
plural reference. 
And now you know more about object pronouns.
235
< voltar para o índice
There are usually two ways to make a statement:
1. By using the ACTIVE VOICE. In this case, we emphasize the doer of an action, 
which is the subject. 
Usando a voz ativa. Nestes casos, enfatizamos aquele que executa a ação, o sujeito.
Check the examples in the table to see how it works.
ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE
Active Voice
People speak Portuguese in Brazil.
As pessoas falam português no Brasil.
(The focus is on the subject people, and Portuguese is the object.)
(O foco está no sujeito “people” e “Portuguese” é o objeto.)
Passive Voice
Portuguese is spoken in Brazil (Portuguese = subject)
Português é falado no Brasil.
(Portuguese is the subject of the sentence for we want to emphasize the language and not who speaks it.)
(“Portuguese” é o sujeito da frase, porque queremos enfatizar o idioma, e não quem o fala.)
2. By using the PASSIVE VOICE. In such cases, we emphasize to the receiver of the 
action. The receiver in the active voice becomes the subject in the passive voice. 
Usando a voz passiva. Nestes casos, enfatizamos o receptor da ação. O receptor da 
voz ativa se transforma no sujeito da voz passiva.
236
< voltar para o índice
Passive Voice
Active Voice
People speak Portuguese in Brazil.
As pessoas falam português no Brasil.
(People = Subject of 
the Active Voice obligatory)
ACTIVE VOICE VS. PASSIVE VOICE
So, as we’ve seen, the object in the active voice becomes the subject of the passive voice. The subject of 
the active voice becomes the agent of the passive voice, and it can be left out of the sentence. If it is included, 
it is preceded by the preposition by. 
Passive Voice
Portuguese is spoken by people in Brazil.
Português é falado pelas pessoas no Brasil.
(By people = Agent of 
the Passive Voice optional)
In order to turn the active voice into the passive voice, there are some steps to be 
followed. Check them out in the table.
1. Use the object of the active voice as the subject of the passive voice.
Use o objeto da voz ativa como o sujeito da voz passiva.
2. Include auxiliary verbs depending on the verb form.
Inclua verbos auxiliares dependendo da forma verbal.
3. Include the verb TO BE as the auxiliary verb of the passive voice (use 
the same verb form as the main verb in the active voice).
Inclua o verbo TO BE como verbo auxiliar da voz passiva (no mesmo 
tempo verbal do verbo principal).
4. Use the main verb of the active voice in the past participle.
Use o verbo principal da voz ativa no particípio passado.
5. Include the agent of the passive (if necessary).
Inclua o agente da passiva (se necessário).
6. Adverbs or adverbial phrases may be placed in the same position in 
both active and passive voices.
Advérbios ou locuções adverbiais podem ser colocados na mesma posição 
tanto na voz ativa quanto na voz passiva.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
237
< voltar para o índice
Let’s see some examples of how we can turn active sentences into the passive voice.
Active Voice
Jane Austen probably wrote Pride and Prejudice in 1812.
Jane Austen provavelmente escreveu Orgulho e preconceito em 1812.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Passive Voice
Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812.
Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812.
Pride and Prejudice was probably written in 1812 by Jane Austin.
Orgulho e preconceito provavelmente foi escrito em 1812 por Jane Austin.
Let’s see an example of a sentence in which there are auxiliary verbs in the active voice.
Active Voice
My brother was painting my house on the weekend.
Meu irmão estava pintando a minha casa no f im de semana.
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
Passive Voice
My house was being painted on the weekend.
Minha casa estava sendo pintada no f im de semana.
My house was being painted by my brother on the weekend.
Minha casa estava sendo pintada pelo meu irmão no f im de semana.
It’s important to notice that not every sentence in the active voice can be turned into the passive voice. 
This happens when there is no object in the sentence or when the meaning would not be clear in the passive 
voice. Or it could be simply because the emphasis or focus intended by the speaker cannot be expressed by a 
passive structure.
238
< voltar para o índice
Julia is a lovely girl.
A Julia é uma menina adorável.
ACTIVE VOICE ONLY
Pompeii was rediscovered late in the 16th century.
Pompeia foi redescoberta no f im do século XVI.
PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – The doer is irrelevant
The active voice is definitely the most frequent construction in 
communication. When the speaker chooses to move from the active 
voice to the passive voice, there is usually a reason for that. For 
example, if we consider that the doer of the action is irrelevant, we’ll 
go for the passive voice.
We studied together.
Nós estudamos juntos.
Mary has two sons.
Mary tem dois f ilhos.
Thenew drug wasn’t tested on animals.
O novo remédio não foi testado em animais.
PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – Formal / Scientific contexts
In scientif ic contexts, the passive voice is commonly used.
My cell phone was stolen.
O meu celular foi roubado.
PASSIVE VOICE
Uses – The doer is unknown
If the doer is unknown, we’ll also use the passive voice.
Now you know the difference between the active and passive voices, the structure of the passive 
voice and how to use it, as well as cases in which the passive voice can’t be used.
239
< voltar para o índice
my dog
meu cachorro
(It’s not your dog or his dog, it is my dog)
our house
nossa casa
(It’s not a house or a beautiful house, it is our house)
their books
os livros deles
(It’s not just any book, it is their books)
Possessive adjectives are always used before a noun, and they determine who 
possesses the noun to which they refer.
Take a look at the following table to see all the possessive adjectives in English.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
 Singular Plural
 My Our
 meu(s), minha(s) nosso(s), nossa(s)
 
 Your Your
 teu(s), tua(s), seu(s), sua(s) seus, suas, de vocês
 His
 seu(s), sua(s), dele
 Her Their
 seu(s), sua(s), dela seus, suas, deles, delas
 Its
 seu(s), sua(s), dele, dela
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Second person
Third person
First person
240
< voltar para o índice
Possessive Adjectives 
Is this cute boy your son?
Este menino fofo é seu/teu f ilho?
Este menino fofo é f ilho de vocês?
It is important to notice that possessive adjectives in English do not suffer 
number or gender variations according to the nouns to which they are referring, 
as opposed to what happens in several other languages.
That means that the possessive adjectives will keep the same form whether they 
are referring to a singular noun or to a plural noun, as well as to a masculine, 
neutral, or female noun.
Let’s take a closer look at each one of them.
For the first person, we’ll use the possessive adjective my in the singular or our 
in the plural.
This is my dog.
Este é o meu cachorro.
That is our house.
Aquela é nossa casa.
These are my daughters.
Estas são minhas f ilhas.
Those are our sons.
Aqueles são nossos f ilhos.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
First Person (singular and plural)
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Second Person
For the second person, we’ll use your. This possessive adjective will 
be the same for both the singular and plural forms, and only the 
context will make it clear if we are referring to one or more owners.
241
< voltar para o índice
Jeff is my best friend. I’m going to his birthday party.
Jeff é o meu melhor amigo. Eu estou indo à sua festa de aniversário.
I’m going to Jeff’s birthday party.
Eu estou indo à festa de aniversário do Jeff.
(Jeff’s name wasn’t mentioned before, so the possessive case is used 
because it makes it clear whose birthday party it is.)
(O nome do Jeff não havia sido mencionado anteriormente, então usa-se o 
possessive case porque ele deixa claro de quem é a festa de aniversário.)
When we express possession referring to the third person, singular or plural, 
we can use the possessive case or the possessive adjectives his, her, its in the 
singular, or their in the plural.
The possessive case might be preferred if it is not clear in the context to whom 
we are referring. 
POSSESSIVE CASE
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE
If the context makes it clear to whose party we are referring, we can replace the 
possessive case with a third person possessive adjective. 
For the third person singular, we’ll use the possessive adjectives his for a masculine owner, her for feminine, 
and, for other cases, we will use its.
George is traveling with his wife.
George está viajando com a sua esposa / a esposa dele.
(We used “his” because we are talking about George’s wife, and George is a man.)
(Usamos his porque estamos nos referindo à esposa do George, e George é um homem.)
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Third Person Singular
242
< voltar para o índice
George and Paula are traveling with their son.
George e Paula estão viajando com o seu f ilho / o f ilho deles.
The kids are playing with their toys.
As crianças estão brincando com os seus brinquedos / os brinquedos delas.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
Third Person Plural
In the third person plural, we will use their regardless of the gender.
Paula is traveling with her husband.
Paula está viajando com o seu marido / o marido dela.
(We used “her” because we are talking about Paula’s husband, and Paula is a woman.)
(Usamos her porque estamos nos referindo ao marido da Paula, e Paula é uma mulher.)
Don’t use this computer. Its keyboard is not working.
Não use este computador. Seu teclado / O teclado dele não está funcionando.
(We used “its” because we are talking about the computer keyboard, which is an object.)
(Usamos its porque estamos nos referindo ao teclado do computador, que é um objeto.)
And this is how we use the possessive adjectives in English.
243
< voltar para o índice
The possessive case is used in English to express possession, as well 
as interpersonal relationships, such as family, friendship, or hierarchic 
relationships.
The structure of the possessive case is the following:
POSSESSIVE CASE ( ’S)
( 1 ) Noun identifying who owns something 
( 2 ) Particle that identif ies the possession or relationship (’s)
( 3 ) Noun identifying the element that is possessed
These are Mary’s shoes.
Estes são os sapatos da Mary.
That is Julia’s cat.
Aquele é o gato da Julia.
This is Martin’s son.
Este é o filho do Martin.
Mr. Johnson is Karen’s boss.
Sr. Johnson é o chefe da Karen.
There are situations in which more than one person will be identif ied as the 
owner of an object or animal, or even some sort of relationship. In such cases, we 
may identify each of these people, but there are two different ways to build this 
structure.
(1) (2) (3)
(1) (2) (3)
(1) (2) (3)
(1) (2) (3)
244
< voltar para o índice
Possessive Case
In the first situation we’re going to explore, there is only one object that is 
shared by two or more people, so we don’t repeat the apostrophe + S indicating 
possession; that means we’ll use it only once, after the last noun.
POSSESSIVE CASE
POSSESSIVE CASE
One element two or more owners
One apostrophe + s (’s) after the last noun
This is Peter and John’s bedroom.
Este é o quarto do Peter e do John.
(There is only one bedroom owned by Peter and John)
(Há apenas um quarto que pertence a Peter e John)
Molly is Carol and Tom’s daughter.
A Molly é filha da Carol e do Tom.
(Both Carol and Tom are Molly’s parents)
(Tanto Carol quanto Tom são pais da Molly)
Two or more elements two or more owners
One apostrophe + s (’s) after each person
These are Peter’s and John’s beds.
Estas são as camas do Peter e do John.
(There are two beds: one belongs to Peter and the other, to John)
(Há duas camas: uma pertence a Peter, e a outra, a John)
These are Peter’s and John’s bikes.
Estas são as bicicletas do Peter e do John.
(There are two bikes: one belongs to Peter and the other, to John)
(Há duas bicicletas: uma pertence a Peter, e a outra, a John)
In the other situation, there is more than one object that belongs to different 
people. In this case, we’ll repeat the apostrophe + S indicating possession 
after each person.
245
< voltar para o índice
When the noun identifying who owns the element is in the plural 
and ends in -S, we will add just an apostrophe.
For singular nouns ending in -S or for nouns with irregular plural, 
we will use the apostrophe + S.
There are still cases in which we omit the noun that identif ies the 
element we are talking about. That happens when it’s clear in the 
context what we are talking about. 
POSSESSIVE CASE
POSSESSIVE CASE
Nouns ending in -S
Owner in the plural ending in -S
Add just the apostrophe (’) 
These are the girls’ shoes.
Estes são os sapatos das meninas.
Those are the boys’ bikes.
Aquelas são as bicicletas dos meninos.
This is the kids’ bedroom.
Este é o quarto das crianças.That is my boss’s wife.
Aquela é a esposa do meu chefe.
This is Jonas’s bedroom.
Este é o quarto do Jonas.
These are the children’s games.
Estes são os jogos das crianças.
246
< voltar para o índice
POSSESSIVE CASE
Is this Mark’s bedroom?
Esse é o quarto do Mark?
No, this is Peter’s.
Não, esse é do Peter.
(We can omit the noun “bedroom” in the answer since it’s clear that we are talking about it.)
(Podemos omitir o substantivo “bedroom” na resposta, pois f ica claro que estamos falando sobre isso.)
Are you going home?
Você está indo para casa?
Yes, but I’ll stop by Julia’s first.
Sim, mas eu vou passar na Julia primeiro.
(It’s clear in this context that we are referring to Julia’s house, so we can omit the noun “house.”)
(É claro pelo contexto que estamos nos referindo à casa da Julia, por isso podemos 
omitir o substantivo “house”.)
That’s it. Now you know the structure and the use of the possessive case.
247
< voltar para o índice
There are different ways to express possession in English. For example, we can 
use the verb to have, the possessive case, possessive adjectives, or possessive 
pronouns.
The possessive case structure will only be used to refer to the third person, 
either singular or plural.
Julia has two dogs.
A Julia tem dois cachorros.
This is Peter’s wallet.
Esta é a carteira do Peter.
This is Brian and Meg’s baby.
Este é o bebê do Brian e da Meg.
These are her dogs.
Estes são os cachorros dela.
This is the president’s house.
Esta é a casa do presidente.
These are Julia’s dogs.
Estes são os cachorros da Julia.
These dogs are hers.
Estes cachorros são dela.
POSSESSIVE CASE
EXPRESSING POSSESSION
248
< voltar para o índice
 Possessive Pronouns
It is possible to omit the noun following the possessive if it’s clear what we are 
talking about in the context. For example:
Possessive adjectives also indicate possession or belonging, and they are always 
used before a noun. They are called possessive adjectives precisely because they 
are placed in the same position as most adjectives in English: before the noun.
However, when it is not necessary to mention what you are talking about 
because it is clear in that context or because the noun has been mentioned before 
in the sentence or in the conversation, we will replace the structure possessive 
adjective + noun with a possessive pronoun.
Whose shirt is this?
De quem é esta camisa?
Is this your shirt?
Esta é a sua camisa?
Is this your shirt?
Esta é a sua camisa?
It is Joana’s.
É da Joana.
Yes, this is my shirt.
Sim, esta é a minha camisa.
Yes, it’s mine.
Sim, é minha.
(“mine” = my shirt).
POSSESSIVE CASE
Omitting the Noun
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
249
< voltar para o índice
Possessive Adjective 
my
meu, meus, minha, minhas
your
seu, seus, sua, suas, 
teu, teus, tua, tuas
his
dele
her
dela
its
dele, dela
our
nosso, nossos, nossa, nossas
your
seus, suas, vosso, vossos, 
vossa, vossas
their
delas, deles
Possessive Pronoun 
mine
meu, meus, minha, minhas
yours
seu, seus, sua, suas, 
teu, teus, tua, tuas
his
dele
hers
dela
its
dele, dela
ours
nosso, nossos, nossa, nossas
yours
seus, suas, vosso, vossos, 
vossa, vossas
theirs
delas, deles
And now you know how to express possession in English, 
especially using possessive pronouns.
Now, check the following table with possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns according to 
whom they refer.
 
 
Second person
Singular
Second person
Plural
Third person
Singular
Third person
Plural
First person
Singular
First person
Plural
250
< voltar para o índice
The present continuous is mainly used to talk about actions and events in 
progress at the moment or about temporary states or situations that are true at 
the moment of speaking. 
The basic structure of the present continuous is the verb to be, which works as 
an auxiliary, and a main verb in the -ING form. The verb to be will be conjugated 
according to the subject. Take a look at its structure:
Affirmative
Subject + To Be + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement
I am watching a movie.
Eu estou assistindo a um filme.
Negative
Subject + To Be + Not + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement
I am not hearing you.
Eu não estou te ouvindo.
Interrogative
To Be + Subject + Verb in the -ING Form + Complement
Are you taking your pills?
Você está tomando os seus remédios?
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Structure
251
< voltar para o índice
Present Continuous
We can use the present continuous to talk about 
changes that take time.
It’s getting easier every day.
Está f icando mais fácil a cada dia.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Gradual Change
The present continuous can also be used to describe 
actions that are repeated or frequent, but that we 
believe to be a temporary situation, different from our 
routine. 
I am working a lot this week.
Estou trabalhando muito nesta semana.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Repeated Temporary Actions and Events
The present continuous is also used to talk about future 
events that have been previously arranged or planned.
I am getting married next week.
Vou me casar na próxima semana.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Future
Some verbs are not used in the continuous form, 
even if they refer to temporary situations or things 
that are happening now. They are called non-
progressive verbs, and they express feelings, like 
the verbs to love and to hate; mental states and 
opinions, like the verbs to believe, to guess, and to 
agree; and senses, like the verbs to see and to hear. 
I like this book.
NOT: I am liking this book.
Eu gosto desse livro.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Non-progressive Verbs
252
< voltar para o índice
Some of these non-progressive verbs can be used with continuous forms, 
but they will have different meanings.
I see someone at the door.
Eu estou vendo alguém na porta.
I have two pieces of luggage. 
Eu tenho duas malas.
I am seeing someone. 
Eu estou saindo com alguém. 
I am having breakfast at the hotel restaurant.
Eu estou tomando café da manhã no restaurante do hotel.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS
Non-progressive Verbs in Continuous Forms: Different Meaning
Now you know what the present continuous is all about: you’ve seen its 
structure, some examples, and how to properly use it.
253
< voltar para o índice
Common question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, 
and how. On this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the question word how.
The question word how means “in what way” or “to what extent” and, as all the 
other question words, it can be used in direct and indirect questions.
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Direct and Indirect Questions
How are you feeling?
Como você está se sentindo?
(Direct Question: How + Structure of the Interrogative Form)
Can you tell me how you are feeling?
Você pode me dizer como está se sentindo?
(Indirect Question: How + Structure of the Affirmative Form)
The structure for direct questions is the question word followed by the 
interrogative form, and it can be used with different verb forms. 
In the simple present, we can use how with the verb to be or with other verbs. 
The difference is that when the verb to be is the main verb, we do not use an 
auxiliary verb. For all the other verbs, an auxiliary must be used to create the 
questions.
Check out some examples:
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Simple Present
Structure: How + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)
How are the kids?
Como estão as crianças?
(main verb is the verb to be = do not use an auxiliary verb)
254
< voltar para o índice
Question Word - How 
Structure: How + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form 
+ Complement (if necessary)
How do you go to work?
Como você vai para o trabalho?
(main verb is not the verb to be = the auxiliary verb do must be used)
Structure: How + Verb to Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)
How was the game?
Como foi o jogo?
(main verb is the verb to be = do not use an auxiliary verb)
Structure: How + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
Howdid you go to the game?
Como você foi para o jogo?
(main verb is not the verb to be = the auxiliary verb did must be used)
How can also be used in the simple past, and the structure will follow the same 
pattern of the simple present. The difference is that the verb to be or the auxiliary 
verb will be conjugated in the past. 
The question word how can also be used with continuous forms such as the 
present and the past continuous. In this case, we’ll use how followed by the 
interrogative form of these structures.
For the interrogative form of the present and past continuous, the verb to be 
works as an auxiliary verb, followed by the subject, the main verb in the -ING 
form, and a complement, if necessary.
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Simple Past
255
< voltar para o índice
Structure: How + Verb to Be + Subject + Main Verb in the -ING Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
How are you organizing your tasks?
Como você está organizando as suas tarefas?
(I am asking about an action that is in progress now)
How were you feeling when you started therapy?
Como você estava se sentindo quando iniciou a terapia?
(I asked about a feeling that was going on before the person decided to start therapy)
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Present and Past Continuous
It is also possible to use how with perfect forms such as the present perfect and 
the present perfect continuous.
Structure: How + Verb To Have + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)
How have you been?
Como você tem estado?
(I want to know how this person has been lately or since I last saw him or her)
Structure: How + Verb To Have + Subject + Been + 
Main Verb in the –ING Form + Complement (if necessary)
How have you been dealing with this situation?
Como você tem lidado com essa situação?
(It’s an ongoing situation that started in the past and is still going on)
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous
256
< voltar para o índice
Structure: How + Modal Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
How should we help her?
Como devemos ajudá-la?
(Should works as an auxiliary, and it was used to ask for 
guidance or recommendation)
How can we go to the party?
Como podemos ir para a festa?
(Can works as an auxiliary, and it shows the idea of possibility)
We also use how with modal 
verbs. In this case, they come right 
after the question word.
If you want to ask more specif ic questions using how, you can use an 
adjective or an adverb after it. Check out the examples.
How old is your brother?
Quantos anos seu irmão tem?
(How + Old = Age)
How much is this T-shirt?
Quanto custa esta camiseta?
(How + Much = Amount or Price)
How often do you go to the gym?
Com que frequência você vai à academia?
(How + Often = Frequency)
How many people were there at the concert?
Quantas pessoas havia no show?
(How + Many = Quantity)
How far is San Diego from Los Angeles?
Quão distante é San Diego de Los Angeles? / Qual é a distância de San Diego a Los Angeles?
(How + Far = Distance)
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Modal Verbs
QUESTION WORD – HOW
Other Possibilities
How long does it take to get there?
Qual tempo demora para chegar lá?
(How + Long = Duration)
How tall is your brother?
Qual é a altura do seu irmão?
(How + Tall = Height for People)
How high is Mount Everest?
Quão alto é o Monte Everest? / Qual é a altura do Monte Everest?
(How + High = Height for Places)
257
< voltar para o índice
How can also be used with prepositions such as “about.” There are 
two ways we can use it—to offer something or to make a suggestion.
In spoken English, there is a very common expression with how—how come. It is 
used to ask about the reason why something has happened. We could say that how 
come is an informal way to ask “why.”
How come can also be used to show surprise. There is an important detail in the 
structure of the question, though: how come is always followed by the affirmative 
form, regardless of the verb form. 
How about a cup of coffee?
Que tal uma xícara de café?
(How + About + Noun = Offer)
How about going to the movies?
Que tal irmos ao cinema?
(How + About + Verb in the –ING Form = Suggestion)
How come she went to the party alone?
Como assim ela foi à festa sozinha?
(How Come + Structure of the Affirmative Form in the Simple Past)
How come she is not here?
Como é que ela não está aqui?
Como pode ela não estar aqui?
(How Come + Affirmative Form of the Simple Present)
HOW ABOUT
Offers and Suggestions 
HOW ABOUT
Reason and Surprise (Informal)
258
< voltar para o índice
We can also use how in exclamations. It can either be followed by a complete 
sentence or by an adjective. It’s important to notice, though, that what can also 
be used in exclamations.
The difference is that when there is either a complete sentence or only an 
adjective, you’ll use how. However, in the case of the structure adjective + noun 
or just a noun, you’ll have to use what.
Compare the difference:
How + Complete Sentence
How I love this city!
Como eu amo essa cidade!
(How + Subject “I” + Main Verb “love” + Complement “this city”)
How + Adjective
How beautiful!
Que bonito!
(How + Adjective “beautiful”)
What + (Article) + Adjective + Noun
What a beautiful city!
Que cidade bonita!
(What + Article “a” + Adjective “beautiful” + Noun “city”)
HOW AND WHAT
Exclamation
And now you know different ways to use the question word how, it’s meaning, structures in 
different verb forms, as well as how to use it in exclamations.
259
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. On this grammar 
guide, we’ll focus on the question word what, which is used to ask general 
questions.
In most cases, the structure of direct and indirect questions follows this pattern:
But when we ask direct questions with the question word what, there are three 
possible structures.
What is your favorite color?
Qual é a sua cor favorita?
(Direct Question: Question Word + Interrogative Form)
Tell me what your favorite color is.
Diga-me qual é a sua cor favorita.
(Indirect Question: Question Word + Affirmative Form)
1. What + Interrogative Form
2. What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement
3. What + Noun + Interrogative Form
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
Direct and Indirect Questions
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
Structure – Direct Questions
260
< voltar para o índice
Question Word - 
What 
Let’s analyze each structure, starting with the f irst one, which is the question 
word what followed by an interrogative form. This structure can be used with 
any verb form. 
Let’s see some examples:
What does she want for breakfast?
O que ela quer de café da manhã?
(Simple Present: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in its Base Form+ Complement)
What did you do yesterday?
O que você fez ontem?
(Simple Past: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)
What were you doing last week?
O que você estava fazendo semana passada?
(Past Continuous: Question Word + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in the –ING Form + Complement)
What have you been doing lately?
O que você tem feito ultimamente?
(Present Perfect: Question Word + 1st Auxiliary + Subject + 2nd Auxiliary + 
Main verb in the –ING Form + Complement)
What would you do with a million dollars?
O que você faria com um milhão de dólares?
(Simple Present: Question Word + Modal Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in its Base Form + Complement)
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
What + Interrogative Form
261
< voltar para o índice
It is important to notice that the structure what + interrogative form will never be used for 
questions about the subject of the sentence. When we follow this structure, it means that the 
subject is included in the given question.
Let’s take a closer look:
(The question is not about who performs the action, but about what the person 
wants. The subject “she” is part of the question. The core answer is “eggs and toast.”)
(Nãotem relação com o sujeito, mas com o que o sujeito quer fazer. 
O sujeito “ela” é parte da pergunta. A resposta central é “ovos e torradas”.)
(It’s not about who was performing the action, but what the person was doing. 
The subject “you,” which is part of the question, becomes “I” in the answer. 
And the core answer is “traveling.”)
(Não tem relação com quem estava fazendo a ação, mas com o que a pessoa estava 
fazendo. O sujeito “você”, que é parte da pergunta, vira “eu” na resposta. 
A resposta central é “viajando”.)
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
What + Interrogative Form
What were you doing last week?
O que você estava fazendo semana passada?
I was traveling.
 Eu estava viajando.
What does she want for breakfast?
O que ela quer de café da manhã?
She wants eggs and toast.
 Ela quer ovos e torradas.
262
< voltar para o índice
But it is possible to ask questions with the question word what to learn about the subject of a sentence. 
In such cases, we will use the structure: What + Verb in The Third Person Singular + Complement.
Check the following examples:
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
What + Verb in Third Person Singular + (Complement)
(The core answer is “spending time with my family,” which is the subject of the answer and is not 
part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “makes.”)
(A resposta central é “passar tempo com a minha família”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte da 
pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “makes”, deixa.)
(The core answer is “a music festival,” which is the subject of the answer and is not part 
of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “um festival de música”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz parte 
da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)
(The core answer is “not having money to pay their bills,” which is the subject of the answer and is 
not part of the question. That is why the verb in question is in the third person singular “is.”)
(A resposta central é “não ter dinheiro para pagar suas contas”, que é o sujeito da resposta e não faz 
parte da pergunta. Por isso o verbo da pergunta está na terceira pessoa do singular “is”, está.)
What makes you happy?
O que deixa você feliz?
There are so many people here. What’s happening?
Tem tanta gente aqui. O que está acontecendo?
Spending time with my family makes me happy.
Passar tempo com a minha família me deixa feliz.
Not having money to pay their bills (is bothering them).
Não ter dinheiro para pagar as suas contas (está incomodando eles).
A music festival (is happening here).
Um festival de música (está acontecendo aqui).
What’s bothering them?
O que está incomodando eles?
263
< voltar para o índice
Let’s take a closer look and analyze the structure of the examples 
we have previously seen.
If you want to ask a more specific question using what, place a noun right after 
the question word.
What time do you usually wake up?
A que horas você geralmente acorda?
(What + time = used to ask about the hour)
What kind of music do you like?
De que tipo de música você gosta?
(What + kind = used to ask about the specif ic type of a thing)
What size do you need?
De que tamanho você precisa?
(What + size = used to ask about size)
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
What + Noun + Interrogative Form
What + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement (if necessary)
 
What makes you happy?
 
What’s happening?
What’s bothering them?
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(3)
264
< voltar para o índice
There are still some special cases, such as what + about. It is used 
to make an offer or to ask about your opinion or how you feel about 
something.
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
Special Cases – What About
In informal conversations, there are some common 
expressions with the question word what.
What’s up?
E aí?
What now?
O que agora?
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
Expressions
What about going to the movies?
Que tal irmos ao cinema?
How are you?
Como vai você?
Great idea.
Ótima ideia.
I’m fine, thanks. What about you?
Eu estou bem. E você?
265
< voltar para o índice
The question word what can also be used in exclamations to express surprise, 
shock, or emotions. In this case, we use: what + an article + (an adjective) + a 
noun. We may or may not include the adjective, but the noun must always be 
there in exclamations with what.
Structure: What + Article + (Adjective) + Noun
What a (beautiful) place!
Que lugar (bonito)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “beautiful”) + Noun “place”)
What a great song!
Que música ótima!
(What + Article “a” + Adjective “great” + Noun “song”)
What a (nice) gesture!
Que gesto (legal)!
(What + Article “a” + (Adjective “nice”) + Noun “gesture)
What a song!
Que música!
(What + Article “a” + Noun “song”)
QUESTION WORD – WHAT
Exclamations
Now you know different ways in which you can use the question word what, the structure used 
with different verb forms, as well as how to use it in exclamations and expressions.
266
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common 
question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how. 
On this grammar guide, we’ll focus on the question word when, which is used 
to ask or to explain at what occasion or moment something takes place.
Check out some examples of when used in direct and indirect questions:
When
Quando
When are you traveling?
Quando você viaja?
(Direct Question: When + Structure of the Interrogative Form)
Tell me when you are going to travel.
Me diga quando você vai viajar.
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)
Could you tell me when you are going to travel?
Você poderia me dizer quando você vai viajar?
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)
QUESTION WORD - WHEN
QUESTION WORD – WHEN
Direct and Indirect Questions
In general, the structure to make these interrogative sentences is the question 
word when followed by the structure of the interrogative form, which can be 
used with different verb forms. 
267
< voltar para o índice
Question Word - 
When 
In the simple forms, when the verb to be is the main verb of the sentence, there is no auxiliary. 
For all the other verbs, you’ll need the auxiliary verb to make an interrogative sentence. 
Structure: When + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement
When are you free?
Quando você está livre?
(are = simple present)
When was she born?
Quando ela nasceu?
(was = simple past)
Structure: When + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
When does she have English classes?
Quando ela tem aulas de inglês?
(does = auxiliary for the simple present)
When did you start college?
Quando você começou a faculdade?
(did = auxiliary for the simple past)
QUESTION WORD – WHEN
Simple Forms – Simple Present and Simple Past
We can use when with continuous forms such as the present continuous to 
indicate actions in the future. 
Structure: When + Verb To Be + Subject + Main Verb in the –ING Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
When are you moving to Italy?
Quando você se mudará para a Itália?
QUESTION WORD – WHEN
Continuous Forms
268
< voltar para o índice
The same happens with perfect forms. It’s important to notice, though, that most 
perfect forms do not refer to a specific point in time, so questions with perfect 
forms are usually accompanied by an adverb of time. Check out the examples:
PRESENT PERFECT
Structure: When + Verb To Have + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)
When has she ever helped her parents?
Quando na vida ela ajudou seus pais?
(Rhetorical question reinforced by the adverb “ever”)
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
Structure: When + Verb To Have + Subject + Been + 
Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)
Since when have you been studying?Desde quando você está estudando?
(The adverb “since” is used to ask about a starting point)
QUESTION WORD – WHEN
Perfect Forms
It’s important to notice that if we want to ask about the specific 
time when an activity or event starts or ends, the preferred 
question is “what time” and not “when.” 
What time did you leave work yesterday?
A que horas você saiu do trabalho ontem?
When did you leave work yesterday?
Quando você saiu do trabalho ontem?
QUESTION WORDS
Specific Time
And now you know what a question word is and how to use the question 
word when with different verb forms.
269
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common question 
words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how. On this grammar 
guide, we’ll focus on the question word where.
Where is used to ask questions about place.
The question word where can be used in direct and indirect questions.
Where
Onde/Aonde
Where is the subway station?
Onde é a estação de metrô?
(Direct Question: Where + Structure of the Interrogative Form)
I am asking you where the subway station is.
Eu estou te perguntando onde f ica a estação de metrô.
(Indirect Question: When + Structure of the Affirmative Form)
QUESTION WORD - WHERE
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Direct and Indirect Questions
Direct questions with where will follow the same pattern, regardless of the 
verb form. The structure will be the question word where followed by the 
interrogative form.
270
< voltar para o índice
Question Word - 
Where
Take a look at the structure to use where with the simple present. Note that when 
the main verb is the verb to be, there is no auxiliary verb. For all other verbs, the 
auxiliary is necessary.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)
Where are you?
Onde você está?
Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
 Where do you work? Where does she work?
 Onde você trabalha? Onde ela trabalha?
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Where + Interrogative
Questions with where in the simple past follow the same pattern of the simple 
present. The only difference is that you’ll conjugate the verb to be or the auxiliary 
verb in the past
SIMPLE PAST
Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + Complement (if necessary)
Where were you?
Onde você estava?
Structure: Where + Auxiliary Verb + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Base Form + Complement (if necessary)
 Where did you go? Where did he go?
 Aonde você foi? Aonde ele foi?
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Where + Interrogative
271
< voltar para o índice
The question word where can also be used with continuous forms such as the 
present and the past continuous.
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Continuous Forms
Where + Interrogative Form
PRESENT AND PAST
Structure: Where + Verb To Be + Subject + 
Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)
Where are you going?
Aonde você está indo?
Where were you going last night when I arrived?
Aonde você estava indo ontem à noite quando cheguei?
It is possible to use where with perfect forms such as the present 
perfect and the present perfect continuous.
PRESENT PERFECT
A past action that is still relevant. 
Uma ação passada que ainda é relevante. 
Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject + 
Main Verb in the Past Participle + Complement (if necessary)
Where have you been?
Por onde você esteve?
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Perfect Forms
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous
272
< voltar para o índice
Modal verbs can be used in questions with where. In this case, the modal verb 
comes right after the question word.
Structure: Where + Modal Verb + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
Where should we go on our next vacation?
Aonde devemos ir em nossas próximas férias?
(should = recommendation)
Where would you like to live?
Onde você gostaria de viver?
(would = hypothetical question)
Where can we find an ATM machine?
Onde podemos encontrar um caixa eletrônico?
(can = possibility)
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Modal Verbs
PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
Action started in the past and still going on.
Ação iniciada no passado que ainda está acontecendo.
Structure: Where + Verb To Have + Subject + Been + 
Main Verb in the -ING Form + Complement (if necessary)
Where have you been working?
Onde você tem trabalhado?
In English, it is common to use where with verbs followed by prepositions that 
express directions. When we use these prepositions, they are placed right after 
the verb.
Two frequent prepositions used in questions with where are “to” and “from,” 
since they typically follow verbs that express movement.
273
< voltar para o índice
And now you know what a question word is and how to use the question 
word where to ask indirect or direct questions with different verb forms.
Check out some questions with the verbs to go and to come followed by these prepositions.
Where are you going (to)?
Para onde você está indo? / Aonde você está indo?
(The preposition is optional because the verb to go expresses movement toward a place 
with or without the preposition.)
(A preposição é opcional porque ir o verbo ir indica movimento em direção a algum lugar, 
com ou sem preposição.)
Where is she coming from?
De onde ela está vindo?
(The preposition is mandatory, otherwise the verb to come might not imply the idea of origin.)
(A preposição é obrigatória, caso contrário, o verbo vir pode não transmitir a ideia de origem.)
QUESTION WORD – WHERE
Where + Verbs Followed by Prepositions
274
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. On this grammar 
guide, we’ll talk about the question word which. 
We use which to ask about specific information. As in some contexts which will 
be interchangeable with the question word what, it’s important to highlight the 
difference between these two question words.
The most important feature of which is that it’s used when there’s a limited 
number of choices in mind. 
QUESTION WORDS
What vs. Which
What’s your phone number?
Qual é o seu telefone?
(There are many possibilities. Country code, area code, 
and several possible combinations of numbers.)
Which size do you want?
Que tamanho você quer?
(There are limited options, such as small, medium, or large.)
In English, when we ask direct questions with both which and what, it’s possible to use a noun 
after the question word to make the question more specif ic.
Again, you’ll choose to use one or the other based on the range of options. Take a look at the 
examples.
QUESTION WORDS
Which vs. What
I bought white and grey paint. Which color will you choose for your bedroom?
Eu comprei tinta branca e cinza. Qual cor você vai escolher para o seu quarto?
(Limited options = only two colors available: white and grey)
275
< voltar para o índice
Question Word - 
Which
Which can also be followed by a pronoun, usually because you don’t want to repeat the 
options you have just given, and in such case, we’ll frequently use the pronoun one. 
QUESTION WORD – WHICH
Which + Pronoun
Structure: Which + Pronoun + Interrogative Form
Mr. Brown and Ms. Davenport are my favorite teachers.
O Sr. Brown e a Sra. Davenport são meus professores favoritos.
OK. But which one do you like the most?
OK. Mas de qual deles você gosta mais?
(Replace “teacher” with “one” since the teachers were already mentioned.) 
We can also use an object pronoun or a determiner right after 
which, but in such case we’ll use which of. Check the examples.
QUESTION WORD – WHICH
Which of
Which of us is going to sleep in the bigger bed?
Qual de nós vai dormir na cama maior?
Which of these jackets is yours?
Qual dessas jaquetas é sua?
I’m trying to decide on the new color of our bedroom walls. What colors do you like?
Eu estou tentando decidir a cor das paredes do nosso quarto. De quais cores você gosta?
(Broader option = from all the colors, you can choose the ones you like)
276
<voltar para o índice
The question word which can be used in direct and indirect questions. In direct questions, it 
follows the interrogative form and structure, whereas in indirect questions we are reporting the 
question or there’s a question within another question.
QUESTION WORD – WHICH
Direct and Indirect Questions
Which dress do you prefer? The pink or the green?
Qual vestido você prefere? O rosa ou o verde?
(Direct Question: Which + Structure of the Interrogative Form)
Can you give me some suggestions on which museums I should visit in Berlin?
Você pode me dar algumas sugestões de quais museus eu devo visitar em Berlim?
(Indirect Question: Which + Structure of the Affirmative Form)
Now you know how to ask questions using the question word which, and know the 
difference between what and which, their use and structure.
277
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. The question word 
who is used to ask questions about people. 
Question Word—Who
Direct and Indirect Questions
Who is that girl?
Quem é aquela garota?
(Direct question = who + structure of interrogative form)
As with all question words, the most frequent structure to ask a direct question is 
the question word followed by the interrogative form in different verb forms. 
In the simple present, when we use who with the verb to be, we do not use an 
auxiliary verb.
WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT
To be
Who is your favorite singer?
Quem é o seu cantor favorito?
(Simple Present + To be = No auxiliary)
Tell me who that girl is.
Diga-me que é essa garota.
(Indirect question = who + structure of aff irmative form)
278
< voltar para o índice
Question Word – 
Who
With all the other verbs in all other verb forms, we need to use an auxiliary verb in the interrogative form. But 
when we ask questions with the question word who, we have to pay special attention to this structure.
The question word who is always used to ask about the identif ication of a person. However, it is possible to 
ask about the subject or the object of the sentence. This is important because the structure of the question 
will change.
Take a look:
When we ask about the subject, the main verb is conjugated in third person singular. Pay attention to the 
structure of the interrogative sentence:
WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT
Questions about the subject 
Structure: Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement
Who helps you with the kids?
Quem te ajuda com as crianças?
(Who + verb in the third person singular “helps” + complement “you with the kids”)
My mom helps me with the kids.
Minha mãe me ajuda com as crianças.
(Subject “my mom” + verb in the aff irmative “helps” + complement “me with the kids”)
(The core of the answer is the subject “My mom.”)
(A parte central da resposta é o sujeito “Minha mãe”.)
When we ask questions to learn about the object of a sentence, then the subject is included in the question, 
and we will use who followed by the structure of the interrogative form.
WHO – SIMPLE PRESENT
Questions about the object
Structure: Who + Structure of the Interrogative Form
Who do you want to win the elections?
Quem você quer que vença as eleições?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary “do” + Subject “you” + Main Verb “want” + Complement)
I want Michael to win the elections.
Eu quero que o Michael vença as eleições.
(Subject “I” + Verb in the Affirmative “want” + Object “Michael” + Complement “to win the elections”)
(The core of the answer is the object “Michael.”)
(A parte central da resposta é o objeto “Michael”.)
279
< voltar para o índice
WHO – SIMPLE PAST
Subject and Object Questions 
Who was Anne Frank?
Quem foi Anne Frank?
(Who + Verb To Be)
Who called you?
Quem te ligou?
(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)
Who did you call?
Para quem você ligou?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary Verb + Subject + Main Verb)
In the simple past, we follow the same pattern. The difference here is that the 
auxiliary verb in the past is did regardless of the subject.
As with the simple present, if we use the verb to be, we don’t use the auxiliary 
verb. We will use was or were, according to the subject.
WHO – CONTINUOUS FORMS
Present and Past Continuous
Who is driving today?
Quem está dirigindo hoje?
(Who + Verb in the third person singular + Complement)
Who were you talking to?
Com quem você estava falando?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary + Subject + Main Verb)
In continuous forms such as the present and the past continuous, we’ll use the 
question word who followed by the interrogative of these structures.
280
< voltar para o índice
With perfect forms, such as the present perfect and the present perfect continuous, 
we’ll use the same patterns.
WORD – PERFECT FORMS
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous
Who has won the most Oscars?
Quem ganhou mais Oscars?
(Who + Verb in the Third Person Singular + Complement)
Who have you been seeing?
Com quem você tem saído?
(Who + Interrogative Form: Auxiliary 1 + Subject + Auxiliary 2 + Main verb)
Who is commonly used with modal verbs. In this case, the modal comes right after the question word.
WHO – MODAL VERBS
Who should we consider for the project?
Quem devemos considerar para o projeto?
Who can help us?
Quem pode nos ajudar?
Who would you take to a desert island?
Quem você levaria para uma ilha deserta?
You can make questions using who and verbs followed by prepositions. In these cases, the prepositions 
go to the end of the sentence.
WHO
Verbs + Prepositions
Who are you going out with?
Com quem você vai sair?
(I am asking about the person or 
people who are joining you.)
Who did you talk to?
Com quem você falou?
(In this question, we want to know 
who that person is.)
And now you know when and how to use who, and you’ve seen its 
structure with different verb forms.
281
< voltar para o índice
The question word whose is used to ask which person owns or is responsible 
for something, and it differs from the question word who, which is used to 
identify people, not ownership. 
It is important to pay special attention to the difference between who’s, which is the contraction of the 
question word who and is, or sometimes who and has, and the question word whose. In spoken language, 
they may sound similar, but their meaning is different. 
We can use two different structures to ask 
questions with whose. We can place the noun we 
are referring to right after the question word or keep 
it in its original interrogative position. Both questions 
have the same meaning.
WHO X WHOSE
WHO’S X WHOSE
WHOSE
Who is that girl?
Quem é aquela menina?
That’s Mary.
Aquela é a Mary
Who’s excited about the project?
Quem está empolgado com o projeto?
(Who’s = Who + is.)
Whose is that girl?
De quem é aquela menina?
She’s Meg’s daughter.
Ela é f ilha da Meg.
Whose project is this?
De quem é esse projeto?
(Whose = to whom the project belongs.)
Whose purse is this?
De quem é essa bolsa?
Whose is this purse?
De quem é essa bolsa?
282
< voltar para o índice
Question Word 
Whose
WHOSE + PREPOSITIONS
WHOSE
Simple Forms
WHOSE
Continuous Forms
At whose house are you having lunch?
Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?
Whose house are you having lunch at?
Na casa de quem você vai almoçar?
Whose car is parked in front of the house?
De quem é o carro que está estacionado em frente à casa?
Whose car was parked in front of the house?
De quem é o carro que estava estacionado em frente à casa?
Whose kid is running in the rain?
De quem é a criança que está correndo na chuva?
Whose baby was crying earlier?
De quem é o bebê que estava chorando mais cedo?
Depending on the verb and the speaker’s intention, we can 
also use whose with prepositions. They go either before the 
question word or at the end of the clause. 
We can ask questions with whose using simple forms. 
The question word whose can also be used in continuous forms.
As whose asks about possession, the answers will include the possessive case,possessive 
adjectives, or possessive pronouns. If you want to learn more about how to answer questions with 
whose, there are dedicated grammar guides for each of these topics.
283
< voltar para o índice
Question words are used to ask direct and indirect questions. Common 
question words include what, when, where, which, why, who, and how. 
The question word why is used to ask or to talk about the reason for something.
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why
Por que / Por quê
Just like the other question words, why can be used in direct and indirect 
questions.
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Direct and Indirect Questions
Why are you so sad?
Por que você está tão triste?
(Why + interrogative form = direct question)
Please, tell me why you are so sad.
Por favor, me diga por que você está tão triste.
(A question inside a sentence = indirect question)
Most direct questions will follow this pattern: question word why + 
interrogative form, no matter which verb form you choose to use. 
284
< voltar para o índice
Question Word –
Why
Why did you say that?
Por que você disse isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Simple Past)
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Interrogative Form
I’ve already told you this movie is terrible. Why waste your time with it?
Eu já te disse que esse f ilme é horrível. Por que perder seu tempo com isso?
(Why + verb “to waste” in the infinitive without to)
Why argue with Gabriel? He’ll never change his mind.
Por que discutir com o Gabriel? Ele nunca vai mudar de ideia.
(Why + verb “to argue” in the infinitive without to).
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Infinitive Form (without To)
Questions with why can also be followed by a verb in the infinitive without to. This structure 
is typically used to suggest that an action is pointless or unnecessary. 
Why are you doing this?
Por que você está fazendo isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Present Continuous)
Why have you been going there?
Por que você tem ido lá?
 (Why + Interrogative Form – Present Perfect Continuous)
Why would I do that?
Por que eu faria isso?
(Why + Interrogative Form – Modal Verb)
285
< voltar para o índice
When we reply to a negative statement and we want to ask the reason, why not sounds more natural than 
why. Why not can also be used as a reply when we want to accept a suggestion.
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Not—Replies
It is also possible to use why not when we want to give a suggestion. In this case, 
we can use why not + infinitive without to or we can use why + interrogative-
negative form of the simple present. 
Check the examples:
Why not stay home and watch a movie?
Por que não f icar em casa e assistir a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why not” is followed by the verb “to stay” 
in the infinitive without to and the complement.)
Why don’t we stay home and watch a movie?
Por que a gente não f ica em casa e assiste a um filme?
(In this sentence, “why” is followed by the interrogative-negative 
form of the simple present.)
QUESTION WORD – WHY
Why + Negative Form—Suggestions
Replying to a Negative Statement
Respondendo a uma declaração negativa
I don’t want to go out tonight.
Eu não quero sair hoje à noite.
Why not?
Por que não?
Replying to a Suggestion or Invitation
Respondendo a uma sugestão ou convite
Let’s order some food and watch a movie at 
home.
Vamos pedir comida e assistir a um filme em casa.
Sure, why not?
286
< voltar para o índice
It is important to notice that we use why to ask about the reason, and we use 
because or because of when we are giving the reason for something in aff irmative 
sentences.
The difference is that because will be used before a complete sentence, whereas 
because of will be followed by a noun or noun phrase. 
Why are you leaving earlier?
Por que você está saindo mais cedo?
BECAUSE VS. BECAUSE OF
Now you know what a question word is, how to use why as a question word 
using different verb forms, and how to use because to state reasons. 
Because I have a doctor’s appointment.
Porque eu tenho uma consulta médica.
(Complete sentence = Because + Subject + Verb + Complement)
Because of my doctor’s appointment.
Por causa da minha consulta médica.
(Because of + Noun Phrase)
287
< voltar para o índice
Now, imagine, we want to replace the object of the sentence, which is 
John, with a pronoun. In this case, we would use an object pronoun, as you 
can see in the following sentence.
Reflexive pronouns are used when the object and the subject of the sentence 
refer to the same person or to the same thing.
First, check what is an object pronoun. 
Mary talked about John for hours.
Mary falou sobre o John por horas.
(Mary performs the action. Therefore, she is the subject of the sentence; 
and John, who receives it, is the object.)
(Mary pratica a ação. Portanto, ela é o sujeito da frase; 
e John, que recebe a ação, é o objeto.)
Mary talked about him for hours. 
Mary falou sobre ele por horas.
(Him replaces John, which is the object; so, it is an object pronoun.)
(Ele substitui John, que é o objeto da frase. 
Por essa razão, é um object pronoun.)
OBJECT PRONOUNS
288
< voltar para o índice
Reflexive Pronouns
Finally, pay attention not to confuse reflexive pronouns with object pronouns. 
Reflexive pronoun
Mary talked about herself for hours.
Mary falou de si mesma por horas.
(Mary performed the action and she was also the object of the action.)
(Mary praticou a ação e também foi objeto da ação.)
Object pronoun
Jane was absent and Mary talked about her.
Jane estava ausente, e Mary falou sobre ela.
(Mary talked about another person, Jane. So, we can use the object pronoun her to replace Jane.)
(Mary falou sobre outra pessoa, Jane. Então, podemos usar o object pronoun her para substituir Jane).
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS AND OBJECT PRONOUNS
The second sentence should be avoided. It sounds ambiguous since two female names were 
mentioned before. Still, it’s clear that Mary is not talking about herself, because we used the object 
pronoun her and not the reflexive herself.
Now, check the reflexive pronoun. 
Mary talked about herself for hours.
Mary falou de si mesma por horas.
(Mary performed the action, and she was also the object of the action.)
(Mary praticou a ação, e também foi objeto da ação.)
The person who performs the action, that is, the subject, 
is the same person who receives the action: the object.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 
289
< voltar para o índice
You can see the relation of each subject pronoun to its corresponding reflexive 
pronoun on the following table.
Now that you know the reflexive pronouns in English, check their use.
We mainly use them when the subject and the object of the sentence 
refer to the same person or thing. 
 
 
Reflexive Pronoun 
myself
eu mesmo(a)
yourself
você mesmo
himself
ele mesmo / si mesmo
herself
ela mesma / si mesma
itself
a si mesmo(a)
ourselves
nós mesmos(as)
yourselves
vocês mesmos(as)
themselves
eles mesmos/elas mesmas
Subject Pronoun 
I
eu
you
você
he
ele
she
ela
it
ele(a) / isso
we
nós
you
vocês
they
eles/elas
Singular
Plural
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
290
< voltar para o índice
I have to take care of myself.
Eu preciso me cuidar.
(I have to take care of my own. 
So, I am both the doer and the beneficiary of the action.)
He cut himself this morning.
Ele se cortou essa manhã.
(He was performing some action when he accidently cut himself. 
So, he did it and he was affected by it.)
Her songs are all about herself.
As músicas dela são todas sobre ela mesma.
(The subject her songs is equivalent to they, but there is a relation 
between the possessive adjective her, which is part of the subject, and the 
complement herself.)
His dogs bite themselves.
Os cachorros dele se mordem.
(The subject his dogs can be replaced by they. Themselves refers to they.)
I agree with that.
Eu concordo com isso.
I myself agree with that.
Eu mesmo(a) concordo com isso.
(Here, I am emphasizing that it’s my opinion.)
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
In some situations,ref lexive pronouns are used even if the subject and the 
object are not the same but are somehow related.
We can also use reflexive pronouns to emphasize the subject of the sentence. In this case, they 
are not the object of the action, and they can be removed from the sentence without changing the 
meaning. But if we decide to use it, we should place the reflexive right after the subject or at the 
end of the sentence.
291
< voltar para o índice
Now you know what a reflexive pronoun is and how to use it.
I like to be by myself.
Eu gosto de f icar sozinho(a).
(It means that I like to be alone.)
How are you?
Como você está?
I’m so proud of him. He did it all by himself.
Estou tão orgulhoso(a) dele. Ele fez tudo isso sozinho.
(In this case, he didn’t have any help.)
I’m good, what about yourself?
Eu estou bem, e você?
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
It’s important to mention that when we use the preposition by followed by a 
reflexive pronoun, we mean alone or without help. 
There are some special cases in which reflexive 
pronouns can be used in some specif ic questions, 
replacing the object pronoun. 
292
< voltar para o índice
In English, verbs can be either regular or irregular.
Most verbs are regular, that is to say that both their past and past participle will 
follow a general rule for regular verbs, which is to add -ED to the base form. 
REGULAR VERBS
General rule add -ED
to call (called)
chamar, telefonar
to listen (listened)
ouvir
to play (played)
brincar, jogar, tocar
to visit (visited)
visitar
to finish (finished)
acabar, terminar
to look (looked)
olhar, parecer
to show (showed)
mostrar
to want (wanted)
querer
to help (helped)
ajudar
to need (needed)
precisar
to start (started)
começar
to work (worked)
trabalhar
293
< voltar para o índice
Regular Verbs
REGULAR VERBS
For verbs ending in -E, add -D
REGULAR VERBS
Verbs ending with a consonant followed by Y, add -IED
Infinitive Form: to arrive (chegar)
You’ve arrived early.
Você chegou cedo.
Infinitive Form: to live (morar)
I lived in London when I was a child.
Eu morei em Londres quando eu era criança.
Infinitive Form: to introduce (apresentar)
I’ve introduced Julia to Mark.
Eu apresentei a Julia ao Mark.
Infinitive Form: to like (gostar)
I liked this book very much.
Eu gostei muito desse livro.
Infinitive Form: to study (estudar)
Michelle has studied a lot for her math exam.
Michelle estudou muito para sua prova de matemática.
Infinitive Form: to cry (chorar)
The baby cried a lot last night.
O bebê chorou muito noite passada.
Infinitive Form: to try (tentar)
I tried to help her, but I couldn’t.
Eu tentei ajudá-la, mas não consegui.
However, there are some specific spelling rules depending 
on how the base form ends.
For regular verbs that already end in -E, we just add -D. 
For regular verbs that end with a consonant followed by the letter 
Y, we drop the -Y, and add -IED.
294
< voltar para o índice
Infinitive Form: to stop (parar)
We stopped at the drugstore to buy some things.
Nós paramos na farmácia para comprar algumas coisas.
Infinitive Form: to plan (planejar)
We had planned to arrive early, but we are late.
Nós tínhamos planejado chegar cedo, mas estamos atrasados.
Infinitive Form: to prefer (preferir)
Tony preferred to stay home last night.
Tony preferiu f icar em casa noite passada.
Infinitive Form: to occur (ocorrer)
Something unexpected has occurred.
Algo inesperado ocorreu.
British English: Double the L and add -ED
American English: Add -ED
Infinitive Form: to travel (viajar)
I travelled/traveled to Paris in my honeymoon.
Eu viajei para Paris em minha lua de mel.
Infinitive Form: to cancel (cancelar)
The flight has been cancelled/canceled due to bad weather conditions.
O vôo foi cancelado devido ao mau tempo.
When the regular verb ends in the combination of consonant, vowel, consonant 
(CVC) and the last syllable is stressed, we double the final consonant and add 
-ED to form the past. 
Pay attention to the fact that there are also verbs ending in the combination consonant + vowel + consonant 
in which the last consonant is L. 
In British English, these verbs, regardless of the stressed syllable, will always have their past and past 
particle forms with double L. Therefore, travelled with double L or traveled with one L are both correct 
spellings of the past of the verb to travel. The same happens with the verb to cancel.
REGULAR VERBS
Verbs ending in CVC: double the last consonant and add -ED
REGULAR VERBS
Verbs ending in CVC in which the last consonant is L: add -ED or double the L and add -ED
295
< voltar para o índice
REGULAR VERBS
Verbs ending in –C: add -KED
And now you know how to use the regular verbs in the 
past and the past participle.
For verbs ending in -C, we’ll add -KED to form the past and past participle. 
These are rarer cases, but, among the most frequent verbs in the English 
language, we could mention the verb to panic. 
Infinitive Form: to panic (entrar em pânico)
I panicked when I saw my bank balance.
Eu entrei em pânico quando vi meu saldo bancário.
296
< voltar para o índice
Relative pronouns are used to avoid repetitions, and they introduce relative 
clauses. There are several relative pronouns, but the way we use them to connect 
sentences is similar.
The relative pronoun who is used to refer to people. Imagine we know two 
pieces of information about Claire. 
Notice that the subject in both sentences is Claire. Therefore, when we combine 
both sentences into one, we can replace the noun that is repeated, in this case, 
Claire, by the relative pronoun who, which is placed immediately after the noun 
it is replacing in the sentence. 
We can start with the piece of information we want between commas. 
1. Claire, who has been my friend since we were kids, is currently working as a 
consultant.
2. Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.
( 1 )
Claire has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.
( 2 )
Claire is currently working as a consultant.
A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHO
People
297
< voltar para o índice
Relative Pronouns 
Notice that who refers to Claire, as it is replacing this term in the sentence that brings an additional piece of 
information. 
Who can also refer to groups of people, such as committee, police, team, among others. 
If the relative pronoun refers to things, for example, we’ll use the relative pronoun which. It won’t matter if it’s 
being used as the subject or the object of the verb in the sentence. Take a look:
( 1 )
Claire has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.
( 2 )
Claire is currently working as a consultant.
A Claire está atualmente trabalhando como consultora.
 (1) (2) (1)
Claire, who is working as a consultant, has been my friend since we were kids.
A Claire, que está atualmente trabalhando como consultora, é minha amiga desde que éramos crianças.
If there’s a fire, you should call the fire brigade, who deals with this kind of accident.
Se houver um incêndio, você deve chamar a brigada de incêndio, que lida com este tipo de acidente.
(Fire brigade consists of a group of people).
( 1 )
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.
( 2 )
I don’t like soccer.
Eu não gosto de futebol.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHO
People
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHO
Groups of People
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH
Things: Subject or Object
298
< voltar para o índice
If we replace soccer for the relative pronoun in the sentence where it is the subject, the relative 
pronoun should be placed right after soccer in the sentence where it is the object, check it out: 
But if we wish to replace it in the sentence where soccer is the object of the verb, it goes like: 
( 1 )
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.
( 2 )
I don’tlike soccer.
Eu não gosto de futebol.
 (2) (1)
I don’t like soccer, which is the world’s most popular sport.
Eu não gosto de futebol, que é o esporte mais popular do mundo.
( 1 )
Soccer is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol é o esporte mais popular do mundo.
( 2 )
I don’t like soccer.
Eu não gosto de futebol.
 (1) (2) (1)
Soccer, which I don’t like, is the world’s most popular sport.
O futebol, do qual eu não gosto, é o esporte mais popular do mundo.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH
Things: Subject or Object
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHICH
Things: Subject or Object
299
< voltar para o índice
Notice that the relative pronoun which comes right after the noun it’s replacing. 
Now that we have seen how to form sentences using the relative pronouns who and which, 
we have to take a closer look at the meaning of the sentences. Check the following pair of 
sentences, which contain a repetition:
We can join these sentences using the relative pronoun who with a coma right 
before it, or without a coma, depending on what we mean.
This not just a punctuation choice. There’s a considerable difference in meaning 
between these two sentences. 
The one with a comma is a non-restrictive clause. That means, for example, that I 
only have one sister and my listener or reader knows that. So, I don’t need to specify 
which of my sisters I’m talking about. This is why I used the comma: because this is 
a non-restrictive clause, also called a non-defining clause. If I only have one sister, 
the fact that she is on vacation is only extra information.
( 1 )
I’m going to travel with my sister.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã.
( 2 )
My sister is on vacation.
Minha irmã está de férias.
I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.
I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause
300
< voltar para o índice
The second sentence is known as restrictive or defining clause. Imagine I have three sisters and one of them 
is on vacation. If I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister,” I need to be more specif ic and define which of them 
I am talking about, so I say, “I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.” The clause with the relative 
pronoun defines which of my sisters is traveling with me.
It is important to identify restrictive and non-restrictive clauses because, as 
mentioned before, the meaning of sentences with restrictive or non-restrictive 
clauses is different. Besides that, we can replace the relative pronouns who and 
which with the relative pronoun that, but only in restrictive clauses.
Let’s use the same sentences we’ve seen before and check how we can do that:
I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.
(Non-restrictive clause: I only have one sister, so I don’t need to specify which sister I’m talking about).
(Oração não restritiva: eu só tenho uma irmã, então, não preciso especif icar de qual irmã estou falando).
I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.
(Restrictive clause: I have three sisters and only one of them is on vacation).
(Oração restritiva: Eu tenho três irmãs, e só uma delas está de férias).
Non-restrictive Clause
I’m going to travel with my sister, who is on vacation.
I’m going to travel with my sister, that is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã, que está de férias.
Restrictive Clause
I’m going to travel with my sister who is on vacation.
I’m going to travel with my sister that is on vacation.
Eu vou viajar com a minha irmã que está de férias.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Non-restrictive Clause vs. Restrictive Clause
RELATIVE PRONOUN – THAT
Restrictive Clauses
301
< voltar para o índice
Whenever that is used as a relative pronoun, there will never be a comma before 
it, because it can only be used in restrictive clauses. The relative pronoun that can 
replace either which or who, so it can refer to both people and things.
There are other relative pronouns, such as where and when. They’ll replace the 
adverb of place and the adverb of time respectively. But both of them can be 
replaced by preposition + which.
The same happens with the relative pronoun when. We can use it as a relative 
pronoun that gives a time reference, or as a preposition followed by which to convey 
the same meaning in a formal structure. 
I know a great restaurant where we can eat.
Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante onde nós podemos comer.
I know a great restaurant at which we can eat.
Eu conheço um ótimo restaurante no qual nós podemos comer.
There isn’t a day when I don’t remember my childhood.
Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.
There isn’t a day in which I don’t remember my childhood.
Não tem um dia em que eu não me lembre da minha infância.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHERE
Places
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHEN
Dates
Another important relative pronoun is whose. It is used to refer to possession by 
people, things, or animals. It will replace a repetition imposed by the genitive case 
or by possessive pronouns and adjectives. For example, let’s suppose we have 
these two pieces of information: 
( 1 )
Tina called me last night.
A Tina me ligou ontem à noite.
( 2 )
Tina’s sister works with me.
A irmã da Tina trabalha comigo.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSE
Possession
302
< voltar para o índice
Now you know it’s possible to avoid repetition 
using relative pronouns in English.
We could put the sentences together by using the relative pronoun whose 
to indicate the fact that Tina has a sister that works with me. Notice that the 
apostrophe + S has been replaced with the relative pronoun whose to indicate 
possession. 
 (1) (2) (1)
Tina, whose sister works with me, called me last night.
Tina, cuja irmã trabalha comigo, me ligou ontem à noite.
RELATIVE PRONOUN – WHOSE
Possession
303
< voltar para o índice
The simple past is a verb form used to talk about things that happened or existed in 
the past. 
Check the structures, starting with aff irmative sentences in the past.
SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences
Structure: Subject + Main Verb (in the Past) + Complement
I watched all the episodes of this series.
Eu assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(I performed this action in the past. It’s over now because I f inished it).
In affirmative sentences, the auxiliary verb is not necessary, but it can be used in some 
specif ic contexts to emphasize the message.
If we decide to use the auxiliary did to add emphasis to aff irmative sentences, the main verb 
goes back to its base form.
SIMPLE PAST
Affirmative Sentences – Adding Emphasis
Structure: Subject + Auxiliary Verb (in the Past) + 
Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement
I did watch all the episodes of this series.
Eu (de fato) assisti a todos os episódios desta série.
(Note that the auxiliary doesn’t have a meaning, only the function of emphasizing).
304
< voltar para o índice
Simple Past – 
Other Verbs
The verb conjugation in the simple past will be the same for all persons, singular or plural. 
What we must take into consideration, though, is that some verbs in English are regular, while 
others are irregular.
In the previous example in the aff irmative form, we used the regular verb to watch in the past, 
which is watched.
For regular verbs, we’ll add -D, -ED, or -IED to the end, depending on how the base form is 
spelled. Check the spelling rules for regular verbs in the past.
SIMPLE PAST – REGULAR VERBS
Spelling Rules
GENERAL RULE: ADD -ED
 To watch – watched To play – played
 Assistir Brincar, jogar, tocar
VERBS ENDING IN -E: ADD -D
 To like – liked To love – loved
 Gostar Amar
VERBS ENDING IN CONSONANT + -Y: DROP THE -Y AND ADD -IED
 To study – studied To cry – cried
 Estudar ChorarCVC VERBS: DOUBLE THE LAST CONSONANT AND ADD -ED
 To stop – stopped To plan – planned
 Parar Planejar
305
< voltar para o índice
These are the spelling rules for all regular verbs in the past, which are most 
verbs in English.
But there are few irregular verbs in English, and they do deserve some special 
attention. As the name says, they are irregular, which means there is not one 
pattern that applies to all of them. 
For instance, some irregular verbs suffer signif icant changes in their base 
forms. That’s the case of the verb to be, which in the past becomes was or were 
depending on the subject, or the verb to have, which becomes had, and the verb 
to go, which becomes went. On the other hand, verbs such as to quit, to put, or 
to cut will keep their base form when conjugated in the past.
SIMPLE PAST
Irregular Verbs
To be – was/were
Ser, estar
To quit – quit
Desistir
To have – had
Ter
To cut – cut
Cortar
To go – went
Ir
To put – put
Botar, colocar
There’s a grammar guide dedicated to irregular verbs in the past. Check it so you can learn 
more about them.
Now, when using sentences in the negative and in the interrogative forms, the fact that the 
verbs can be either regular or irregular is unimportant, since it’s the auxiliary verb did that 
will be conjugated. This means that the main verb goes back to its base form.
SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences
Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement
I didn’t watch this series.
Eu não assisti a esta série.
(didn’t = did not)
306
< voltar para o índice
The contracted form didn’t will be used in most cases. However, in formal 
written language, it is advisable to avoid the use of the contraction. In spoken 
language, if you use the full form, you are adding emphasis to a negative 
statement. 
I did not watch this series.
Eu não assisti a esta série.
SIMPLE PAST
Negative Sentences – Adding Emphasis
For interrogative sentences, we’ll invert the order and place the auxiliary before the subject. 
Structure: Subject + Auxiliary (Did) + NOT + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement
Did you watch all the episodes of the final season?
Você assistiu a todos os episódios da temporada f inal?
SIMPLE PAST
Interrogative Sentences
Now that we’ve seen the simple past in the affirmative form and the spelling 
rules for regular verbs, as well as the structures of negative and interrogative 
sentences, it’s time to see its common usages.
We use the simple past to talk about definite time in the past.
I graduated in December.
Eu me formei em dezembro.
(“To graduate” is a regular verb, and its past form is “graduated”)
We went to the movies yesterday.
Nós fomos ao cinema ontem.
(“To go” is an irregular verb, and its past form is “went”)
SIMPLE PAST
Uses
307
< voltar para o índice
The simple past may or may not have an explicit time reference. 
Either way, it refers to past events. 
We can use the simple past to talk about events that happened once or events that happened 
with some frequency in the past. 
Anne studied with me.
A Anne estudou comigo.
(No time reference: but it’s still a f inished action in past)
Santos Dumont flew around the Eiffel Tower.
Santos Dumont voou em volta da Torre Eiffel.
(No time reference: but it’s still a f inished action in past)
SIMPLE PAST
Uses
I went to Italy for my 15th birthday.
Eu fui para a Itália no meu aniversário de 15 anos.
(The trip to Italy is an isolated event that happened because of my 15th birthday).
Every summer I traveled with my family to Italy.
Todo verão eu viajava com minha família para a Itália.
(The trip to Italy was something that happened more frequently, every summer.)
SIMPLE PAST
Uses
308
< voltar para o índice
When we want to make it clearer that we are talking about a past habit, something that 
happened frequently in the past, it’s also possible to use the expression used to followed 
by a main verb. 
Structure: Subject + Used to + Main Verb (Base Form) + Complement
I used to travel to Italy every summer.
Eu costumava viajar para a Itália todo verão.
(Used to + Main Verb in the Base Form = frequent events or habits in the past)
USED TO
Frequent Events in the Past
Now you know when and why we use the simple past with other verbs, 
as well as its structures and spelling rules.
309
< voltar para o índice
310
 Verb To Be Other Verbs
Interrogative Is she a teacher? Does she work as a teacher?
 Ela é professora? Ela trabalha como professora?
Negative She isn’t a teacher. She doesn’t work as a teacher.
 Ela não é professora. Ela não trabalha como professora.
The simple present was divided into two grammar guides, and we did that 
because there is an important difference in structure.
In this grammar guide, we’ll talk about the simple present with verbs that are not 
the verb to be, that is, all the other verbs. 
When we use the verb to be, we do not use an auxiliary verb to make interrogative 
and negative sentences. But when we use other verbs, we need to use the 
auxiliary verb. The auxiliary verb for the simple present is do or does, according to 
the subject. 
Check out the difference in the box.
SIMPLE PRESENT
The basic structure for the aff irmative form is the SVC structure, that is, subject, 
main verb, and complement. And the verb conjugation works like this: we’ll use the 
base form of the verb for all persons, except for the third person singular. In this 
case, we’ll add –S, –ES, or –IES to the end of the verb, depending on how it’s spelled. 
310
< voltar para o índice
Simple Present -
Other Verbs 
311
Usage of the Auxiliary Do 
I do have the right to speak my mind.
Eu tenho (sim) o direito de dar minha opinião.
(The verb “do” is used as an auxiliary. So it does not have a meaning, but a function). 
(O verbo “do” é usado como auxiliar. Portanto, não tem um signif icado, mas uma função).
If you want to learn more about the third person spelling rules, you can check the grammar 
guide on this topic. However, most verbs will only take a final S in the third person singular, 
as you can see in the following table. 
SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form: Adding Emphasis
Notice that we do not use the auxiliary verb in the affirmative form. But it’s possible to use it to 
add emphasis to a statement. In that case, the auxiliary verb is placed before the main verb. 
 Singular Plural
 I work here. We work here.
 Eu trabalho aqui. Nós trabalhamos aqui.
 You work here. You work here.
 Você trabalha aqui. Vocês trabalham aqui.
 He works here.
 Ele trabalha aqui.
 She works here. They work here.
 Ela trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas trabalham aqui.
 It works for now.
 Isso funciona por enquanto.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Affirmative Form
Second person
Third person
First person
311
< voltar para o índice
312
Thus, it is possible to use the auxiliary with the simple present in the aff irmative form, but it’s also important 
to notice that it adds emphasis to the sentence, which means that it is only going to happen in very specif ic 
contexts.
As for the negative and interrogative forms, the auxiliary do is not optional, it’s necessary.
The basic structure for the negative form is the subject, the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to the 
subject, the negative particle not, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
You should pay close attention to the third person singular. In both negative and interrogative forms, the 
conjugation goes in the auxiliary verb, that is, we will use does, and, because of that, the main verb goes 
back to its base form.
 Singular Plural
 I don’t work here. We don’t work here.
 Eu não trabalho aqui. Nós não trabalhamos aqui.
 You don’t work here. You don’t work here.
 Você não trabalha aqui. Vocês não trabalham aqui.
 He doesn’t work here.
 Ele não trabalha aqui.
 She doesn’t work here. They don’t work here.
 Ela não trabalha aqui. Eles/Elas não trabalham aqui.
 It doesn’t work for now.
 (Isso) não funciona por enquanto.
SIMPLE PRESENTNegative Form
Second person
Third person
First person
Do Not Use the Contracted Form
You do not have the right to shout at people.
Você não tem o direito de gritar com as pessoas.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Negative Form: Adding Emphasis
In informal language, the contracted 
forms don’t (do + not) or doesn’t 
(does + not) are used in most cases. 
In formal written language, we avoid 
using contractions.
On the other hand, in spoken 
language, if we use the full form, 
it probably means we want to add 
emphasis to a negative statement.
312
< voltar para o índice
313
I work at a law firm.
Eu trabalho em um escritório de advocacia.
She works a lot.
Ela trabalha muito.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses
The simple present is used to talk 
about facts and to show repetitions, 
habits, or generalizations. 
The basic interrogative form structure in the simple present is the auxiliary verb do conjugated according to 
the subject, the subject, the main verb in its base form, and the complement, if necessary.
So the position of the auxiliary verb and the subject is inverted, and, once again, in the third person singular, 
the main verb goes back to its base form, and the auxiliary verb is conjugated. 
Check out the following table:
 Singular Plural
 Do I work here? Do we work here?
 Eu trabalho aqui? Nós trabalhamos aqui?
 Do you work here? Do you work here?
 Você trabalha aqui? Vocês trabalham aqui?
 Does he work here?
 Ele trabalha aqui?
 Does she work here? Do they work here?
 Ela trabalha aqui? Eles/Elas trabalham aqui?
 Does it work for now?
 Isso funciona por enquanto?
SIMPLE PRESENT
Interrogative Form
Second person
Third person
First person
313
< voltar para o índice
314
She crosses the street toward him, looks back, and decides to let it go.
Ela atravessa a rua em direção a ele, olha para trás e decide deixar para lá.
He gets the ball, passes through the defense and shoots, but the goalkeeper saves it.
Ele pega a bola, passa pela defesa e chuta, mas o goleiro agarra.
Firefighters save many lives in Brooklyn.
Os bombeiros salvam muitas vidas no Brooklyn.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses
The simple present can convey the idea of immediacy and drama, and that’s why it’s commonly 
used in stories or novels, in sports broadcasting, and in newspaper headlines, even when 
reporting past events. 
It can also be used to present a series of events when we narrate 
something or give instructions and directions.
 First you read the questions, then you have to mark the correct statement.
Primeiro você lê as perguntas, depois você tem que marcar a afirmação correta.
You go straight and turn right on the traffic light.
Você segue em frente e vira à direita no semáforo.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Other Verbs – Uses
314
< voltar para o índice
315
In English, some verbs cannot be used in continuous forms. These verbs are 
called non-progressive verbs, and we use them in the simple present. This 
group is divided into different subgroups of verbs. 
Mental process verbs
know, suppose, think, understand
saber, supor, achar, entender
Verbs that describe senses
smell, taste, hear
sentir cheiro, sentir sabor, ouvir
Verbs that express feelings
admire, adore, hate, like, respect
admirar, adorar, detestar, gostar, respeitar
Speech act verbs
promise, swear, agree, deny
prometer, jurar, concordar, negar
SIMPLE PRESENT
Non-progressive Verbs
And now you know the structure and the most common uses of the simple present.
315
< voltar para o índice
316
The simple present is used to talk about factual information or things 
that happen regularly.
SIMPLE PRESENT
This wall is white.
Esta parede é branca.
(It’s a factual piece of information.)
I sleep for 8 or 9 hours a day.
Eu durmo de 8 a 9 horas por dia.
(It’s part of a routine, something I do every day.)
The simple present will be tackled in two different grammar guides. 
In this one, we’ll focus on the simple present sentences in which the 
main verb is the verb to be. 
Check the following table to see the conjugation of the verb to be in 
the simple present. 
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be
 Singular Plural
First person I am We are
Second person You are You are
Third person He/She/It is They are
316
< voltar para o índice
Simple Present -
Verb To Be
317
There is a different sentence structure for the interrogative, negative, and 
affirmative forms. In affirmative sentences, we’ll frequently use the SVC 
structure, that is, Subject, Verb, and Complement. To make a negative 
statement, you’ll place the negative particle not after the verb. And to ask a 
question, we invert the order and place the verb before the subject.
Affirmative
Subject + Verb To Be + Complement
I’m a writer.
Eu sou escritor.
Negative
Subject + Verb To Be + NOT + Complement
I am not a writer.
Eu não sou escritor.
Interrogative
Verb To Be + Subject + Complement
Are you a writer?
Você é escritor?
 Affirmative Negative
 I’m I’m not
 You’re You aren’t
 He’s/She’s/It’s He/She/It isn’t
 We’re We aren’t
 They’re They aren’t
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Contracted Form
The simple present of the verb to be is commonly 
used in its contracted form, also known as short 
form. Contractions are considered informal, and they 
are very common in everyday situations. However, 
if you want to sound more formal or more emphatic, 
use the full form.
The short or contracted forms can be used in 
affirmative or negative sentences.
317
< voltar para o índice
318
Now that you know the conjugation in the plural and singular forms, its structure 
for aff irmative, negative, and interrogative sentences, as well as its full and 
contracted forms, check out the possible uses of the verb to be in the simple 
present. 
It can be used to refer to personal information such as name, age, profession, 
marital status, and nationality.
I am thirsty.
Eu estou com sede.
(It’s a state. Something I am experiencing now.)
I am skinny.
Eu sou magro(a).
(It refers to a physical characteristic.)
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses
We can also use the verb to be followed by an adjective to talk about 
permanent or temporary physical characteristics and feelings.
Age
I am 36 years old.
Eu tenho 36 anos.
Profession
I am an architect.
Eu sou arquiteta.
Name
I am Sophie.
Eu sou Sophie.
My name is Sophie.
O meu nome é Sophie.
Nationality
I am French.
Eu sou francesa.
Marital Status
I am single.
Eu sou solteira.
318
< voltar para o índice
319
The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about permanent or 
temporary qualities or states, personal characteristics, or mood.
I am stressed.
Eu estou estressado(a).
(It’s a current mood or a temporary state.)
I am a stressed person.
Eu sou uma pessoa estressada.
(It’s part of my personality.)
It’s eleven o’clock.
São onze horas.
Our meeting is on December 3rd.
A nossa reunião é no dia 3 de dezembro.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses
The verb to be in the simple present is also used to talk about time and dates.
We can use the verb to be in the simple present to refer to places and locations as well.
I am at the mall.
Eu estou no shopping.
The 9/11 Memorial is in Manhattan.
O memorial do 11 de Setembro é em Manhattan.
SIMPLE PRESENT
Verb To Be – Uses
And now you know when and why we use the verb to be in the simple present.
319
< voltar para o índice
There are spelling rules for the -ING form in English, which means that 
the way we write the verbs will change according to certain rules.
The general rule for the -ING form is that you just add the suff ix -ING.
There are also some special cases. If the verb ends in an E, drop the 
E and add -ING. 
 watch watching
 assistir assitindo
 do doing
 fazer fazendo
 Verbs ending in -E Drop the -E and add -ING
 take taking
 pegar; levar pegando; levando
 make making
 fazer fazendo
SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
General Rule – Add -ING.SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
Special Cases
Spelling Rules – 
-ING Forms
320
< voltar para o índice
When the verb has one syllable and ends in CVC, that means, consonant plus 
vowel plus consonant, we will usually double the last consonant and add -ING.
 One-syllable verbs Double the last consonant
 ending in CVC and add -ING
 run running
 correr correndo
 get getting
 pegar pegando
 swim swimming
 nadar nadando
SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
Special Cases
However, if the one-syllable verb that ends in CVC finishes in W, X, or Y, 
there will be no double consonant, we will just add -ING.
 CVC ending in Y, W, and X Add -ING
 enjoy enjoying
 gostar; aproveitar gostando; aproveitando
 show showing
 mostrar mostrando
 
 fix fixing
 consertar consertando
SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
Special Cases
321
< voltar para o índice
In the case of two-syllable verbs ending in CVC, there are two rules.
If they end in a stressed syllable, we’ll double the last consonant and add -ING. 
If the last syllable is unstressed, we’ll just add -ING.
Last syllable is stressed
 commit committing
 (se comprometer) (se comprometendo)
Last syllable is unstressed
 whisper whispering
 (sussurrar) (sussurrando)
SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
Two-syllable Verbs Ending in CVC
For the verbs ending in IE, we replace IE with Y and add -ING.
 Ending in IE Change IE for Y and add -ING
 
 die dying
 morrer morrendo
 lie lying
 mentir mentindo
 tie tying
 amarrar amarrando
SPELLING RULES – -ING FORMS
Special Cases
Now you know the spelling rules for the -ING forms.
322
< voltar para o índice
Subject pronouns are personal pronouns that replace nouns that work as the 
subject of the sentence. Let’s take a look at them:
First person pronouns are the ones used to refer to the person speaking; 
second person pronouns refer to the person we are talking to; and third person 
pronouns, to the people or objects we are talking about.
Let’s start analyzing the f irst person pronouns, the ones that refer to the person 
who is talking.
The first person singular pronoun (I) is always written with a capital letter, 
regardless of its position in the sentence. Capitalization does not happen with 
any other pronoun in English, not even with the first person plural (we). 
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
 Singular Plural
 I we
 eu nós
 
 you you
 tu/você vós/vocês
 he
 ele (pessoa)
 she they
 ela (pessoa) eles/elas 
 it
 ele/ela (exceto pessoas)
Second person
Third person
First person
323
< voltar para o índice
Subject Pronouns
For the second person, the subject pronoun you will be used both in the singular 
and in the plural. You always refers to the person or the people you are talking to. 
Therefore, the context will tell you whether it is singular or plural.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
First Person
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
Second Person
You are a teacher.
Você é professor.
(second person singular pronoun you)
You are teachers.
Vocês são professores.
(second person plural pronoun you)
I am her friend.
Eu sou amigo(a) dela.
(f irst person singular pronoun I)
Karen and I work at the same company.
Karen e eu trabalhamos na mesma empresa.
(f irst person singular pronoun I)
We are friends.
Nós somos amigos.
(f irst person plural pronoun we)
That was the moment we decided to quit the job.
Foi nesse momento que nós decidimos deixar o emprego.
(f irst person plural pronoun we)
324
< voltar para o índice
John is a teacher. He is very good.
O John é professor. Ele é muito bom.
(third person singular masculine pronoun he)
Sarah is an actress. She is great.
A Sarah é atriz. Ela é ótima.
(third person singular feminine pronoun she)
Turn off the computer. It’s too hot.
Desligue o computador. Ele está muito quente.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)
Turn the TV down. It’s loud.
Abaixe a televisão. Ela está alta.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it)
The third person is used to refer to the people or objects we are talking about. In the 
third person singular, there are two pronouns used to refer to people, and, in some 
cases, to pets: he and she. “He” is used for the masculine; and “she,” for the feminine. 
For all the other cases, we will use the other third person singular pronoun, it; 
that is, to talk about any other thing in the singular.
Notice that, in the examples we have just seen, the reference of the pronoun it is 
clear in the sentence. It refers to the computer in the f irst example, and to the TV in 
the second one.
But the pronoun it will also be used as a subject in sentences that have an 
impersonal subject. This impersonal use of it introduces new information, and it is 
used particularly to talk about time, dates, the weather, and opinion. 
When it has an impersonal function, it does not refer to a previously mentioned 
noun. In this case, the pronoun it simply works as the subject of the sentence.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
Third Person Singular (He/She)
SUBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)
325
< voltar para o índice
It’s a pleasure to be here.
É um prazer estar aqui.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)
They are good teachers.
Elas são boas professoras.
(third person plural pronoun they)
It’s hot today.
Está quente hoje.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)
They are great students.
Eles são ótimos alunos.
(third person plural pronoun they)
It’s late.
Está tarde.
(third person singular neutral pronoun it impersonal subject)
They are good books.
São bons livros.
(third person plural pronoun they)
SUBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Singular (It)
SUBJECT PRONOUN
Third Person Plural (They)
And now you know how to use subject pronouns in English.
Take a look at the following examples:
For the third person plural, there is only one pronoun: they. This is the plural form of the pronouns he, she, 
and it—meaning this pronoun can be used to refer both to people and objects.
326
< voltar para o índice
327
The modal verb will is mostly used to refer to the future. As all modal verbs, 
it functions as an auxiliary verb, adding meaning to the main verb.
Check the structures for the aff irmative, interrogative, and negative forms.
WILL
Structure 
Affirmative
She will go to college next year.
Ela vai para a faculdade ano que vem.
Subject + Will + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
Negative
Will you talk to her?
Você vai falar com ela?
Will + Subject + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
Interrogative
It won’t rain.
Não vai chover.
Subject + Will + Not (Won’t) + Main Verb in the Base Form + 
Complement (if necessary)
327
< voltar para o índice
Will
328
Tell people what to do
Will you behave now?
Você vai se comportar agora?
Make an offer / a proposal
Will you marry me?
Você quer se casar comigo?
Promises
I will always be with you.
Eu sempre estarei com você.
Willingness and Decisions
I’ll (I + will) get the door.
Eu vou abrir a porta.
I will quit smoking.
Eu vou parar de fumar.
WILL
Uses
WILL
Uses
In the interrogative, we can use will to tell people what to do or to 
make proposals. We can also use it for promises in aff irmative and 
negative sentences.
Will is commonly used to express willingness and decisions about 
the future that we make at the moment we speak.
328
< voltar para o índice
329
You’ll have to attend driving classes to get your driver’s license.
Você terá que fazer aulas de direção para tirar a carteira de motorista.
Refusal 
I won’t (will + not) talk to her.
Eu não vou falar com ela.
She won’t talk to anybody.
Ela não vai falar com ninguém.
Will is also used to refer to things that are inevitable.
It can be used to express refusal in the negative form. 
WILL
Uses
WILL
Inevitability
Now you know that will is a modal auxiliary verb, 
and you are familiar with its structures and common uses. 
329
< voltar para o índice
Version 5.0
	Botão1: 
	Page 4: 
	Page 241: 
	Page 462: 
	Page 683: 
	Page 894: 
	Page 1095: 
	Page 1286: 
	Page 1477: 
	Page 1698: 
	Botão 2: 
	Page 5: 
	Page 61: 
	Page 72: 
	Page 83: 
	Page 254: 
	Page 265: 
	Page 276: 
	Page 287: 
	Page 298: 
	Page 479: 
	Page 4810: 
	Page 4911: 
	Page 5012: 
	Page 6913: 
	Page 7014: 
	Page 7115: 
	Page 7216: 
	Page 9017: 
	Page 9118: 
	Page 9219: 
	Page 9320: 
	Page 9421: 
	Page 11022: 
	Page 11123: 
	Page 11224: 
	Page 11325: 
	Page 12926: 
	Page 13027: 
	Page 13128: 
	Page 13229: 
	Page 13330: 
	Page 14831: 
	Page 14932: 
	Page 15033: 
	Page 15134: 
	Page 17035: 
	Page 17136: 
	Page 17237: